8589

Denon AVR-3806 Handleiding

18
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/142
Pagina verder
AV SURROUND RECEIVER
AVR-3806
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
FCC INFORMATION (For US customers)
2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. PRODUCT
This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained
in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modification not expressly
approved by DENON may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
3. NOTE
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the product
OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
1. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be
read before the product is operated.
2. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be
retained for future reference.
3. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating
instructions should be adhered to.
4. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be
followed.
5. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning.
Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the
product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for
example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in
a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like.
8. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury
to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with
a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the
manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any
mounting of the product should follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the
manufacturer.
9. A product and cart combination should be moved
with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and
uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart
combination to overturn.
10. Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to
protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked
or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the
product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product
should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or
rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type
of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of
the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer
or local power company. For products intended to operate from
battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a
polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider
than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way.
This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into
the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit,
contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat
the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that
they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon
or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the
product.
15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system
is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is
grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges
and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code,
ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding
of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to
an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of
antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and
requirements for the grounding electrode. See Figure A.
16. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning
storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of
time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or
cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to
lightning and power-line surges.
17. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in
the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power
circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When
installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to
keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them
might be fatal.
18. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or
integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or
electric shock.
19. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this
product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage
points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock.
Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
20. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening
or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other
hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
21. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet
and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following
conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
d) If the product does not operate normally by following the operating
instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the
operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls
may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance – this
indicates a need for service.
22. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure
the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the
manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
23. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this
product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to
determine that the product is in proper operating condition.
24. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The product should be mounted to a wall
or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
25. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such
as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
FIGURE A
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
AS PER NATIONAL
ELECTRICAL CODE
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
GROUND
CLAMP
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
NEC - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
2 NOTE ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION
• Avoid high temperatures.
Allow for sufficient heat
dispersion when installed in a
rack.
• Eviter des températures
élevées.
Tenir compte d’une dispersion
de chaleur suffisante lors de
l’installation sur une étagère.
• Handle the power cord carefully.
Hold the plug when unplugging
the cord.
• Manipuler le cordon
d’alimentation avec
précaution.
Tenir la prise lors du
débranchement du cordon.
• Keep the apparatus free from
moisture, water, and dust.
• Protéger l’appareil contre
l’humidité, l’eau et la poussière.
• Unplug the power cord when
not using the apparatus for long
periods of time.
• Débrancher le cordon
d’alimentation lorsque l’appareil
n’est pas utilisé pendant de
longues périodes..
* (For apparatuses with ventilation holes)
• Do not obstruct the ventilation
holes.
• Ne pas obstruer les trous
d’aération.
• Do not let foreign objects into
the apparatus.
• Ne pas laisser des objets
étrangers dans l’appareil.
• Do not let insecticides,
benzene, and thinner come in
contact with the apparatus.
• Ne pas mettre en contact des
insecticides, du benzène et un
diluant avec l’appareil.
• Never disassemble or modify
the apparatus in any way.
• Ne jamais démonter ou modifier
l’appareil d’une manière ou
d’une autre.
Advanced Operation
Remote control unit
Operating DENON audio components ···························47, 48
Preset memory·····································································49
Operating a component stored in the preset memory ·····49 ~ 51
Learning function··································································52
System call ···········································································53
Punch through ······································································54
Setting the back light’s lighting time ····································54
Setting the ambient light sensor ··········································54
Setting the brightness ··························································54
Resetting ··············································································55
Multi zone music entertainment system
Multi-zone playback using the ZONE2
and ZONE3 PREOUT terminals ············································56
Multi-zone playback using the SPEAKER terminals ·············57
Outputting a program source to amplifier, etc.,
in a ZONE2 room (ZONE2 SELECT mode)···························58
Outputting a program source to amplifier, etc.,
in a ZONE3 room (ZONE3 SELECT mode)···························58
Remote control unit operations during
multi-source playback ···························································58
Other function
Playing Super Audio CDs with DENON LINK·······················59
Multi-source recording / playback·········································60
Last function memory ··························································60
Initialization of the microprocessor·······································60
1
Getting Started
Contents
Getting Started
Thank you for choosing the DENON AVR-3806 Digital Surround A / V amplifier. This remarkable component has been engineered to
provide superb surround sound listening with home theater sources such as DVD, as well as providing outstanding high fidelity
reproduction of your favorite music sources.
As this product is provided with an immense array of features, we recommend that before you begin hookup and operation that you
review the contents of this manual before proceeding.
Accessories ··············································································2
Before using·············································································2
Cautions on installation ·························································3
Cautions on handling······························································3
Preparing the remote control unit ········································3
Inserting the batteries ····························································3
Operating range of the remote control unit ························3
Part names and functions
Front panel··············································································4
Display ····················································································4
Rear panel···············································································5
Remote control unit································································5
Easy to setup flow ··································································6
Speaker system layout···························································6
Speaker connections ······························································7
Connecting a DVD player and monitor TV···························8
Auto Setup / Room EQ···························································9
Connecting a microphone ····················································10
Turning on the power ···························································10
Starting Auto Setup ······························································11
Power Amp Assign·······························································11
Preliminary measurements·············································11, 12
Speaker system measurement ············································12
Check of the measurement result ·································12, 13
About the error message ·····················································13
Playing a DVD with surround sound ··································13
Cable indications···································································14
The video conversion function ············································15
On screen display for component
video outputs and HDMI output ·········································15
Connecting equipment with HDMI
(High-Definition Multimedia Interface) terminals
[To convert analog video signals to HDMI signals] ···········16
Connecting a TV tuner ·························································16
Connecting a DBS tuner·······················································17
Playback
Operating the remote control unit········································26
Playing the input source ·······················································27
Playback using the external input (EXT. IN) terminals ··········28
Turning the sound off temporarily (MUTING) ·······················28
Listening over headphones ··················································28
Combining the currently playing sound with the
desired image (VIDEO SELECT) ···········································28
Switching the surround speakers·········································28
Checking the currently playing program source, etc.···········29
Input mode ·····································································29, 30
Room EQ function································································30
Surround
Playing modes for different sources ····································31
Playing audio sources (CDs and DVDs)
2-channel playback modes ···················································32
Dolby Digital mode and DTS surround
(only with digital input) ···················································33, 34
Basic Operation
Getting Started
Easy Setup and Operation
Connecting Other Sources
Connecting the external inputs (EXT. IN) terminals··········17
Connecting a video camera component or video game·······17
Connecting a DVD recorder ·················································18
Connecting a VCR ·································································18
Connecting a CD player························································19
Connecting a turntable·························································19
Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder·························19
Connecting a tape deck························································19
DENON LINK connections····················································20
Connecting equipment with HDMI
(High-Definition Multimedia Interface) terminals········20, 21
Connecting the antenna terminals······································22
Connecting the XM terminal ···············································23
Connecting the CONTROL terminal ····································23
Connecting the TRIGGER OUT terminals···························23
Connecting the MULTI ZONE terminals ·····························24
ZONE2 (or ZONE3) pre-out connections ······························24
ZONE2 / ZONE3 speaker out connections···························24
Connecting the pre-out terminals ·······································25
Connecting the power supply cord·····································25
Night mode···········································································34
Dolby Pro Logic
II
x (Pro Logic
II
) mode ···························36, 37
DTS NEO:6 mode·································································38
Memory and call-out functions (USER MODE function) ······38
DENON original surround modes
Surround modes and their features······································39
DSP surround simulation······················································40
Tone control setting
• Adjusting the tone······························································41
• Tone defeat mode······························································42
Channel level ········································································42
Fader function·······································································42
Listening to the radio
Auto tuning ···········································································43
Manual tuning·······································································43
Preset memory·····································································44
Checking the preset stations················································44
Recalling preset stations ······················································44
XM Satellite Radio
Checking the XM signal strength and Radio ID ···················45
Channel selection ·································································46
Category search····································································46
Direct access of channels ····················································46
2 System setup menu
page 75
page 76
page 76, 77
page 77, 78
page 78, 79
page 79
page 63
page 63, 64
page 64
page 64
page 65, 66
page 66, 67
page 67
page 67
page 67, 68
page 68
page 69
page 70
page 70
page 70, 71
page 72
page 72, 73
page 73, 74
page 74
page 9~13
page 80
page 80
page 80
page 81
page 68, 69
2
We greatly appreciate your purchase of the AVR-3806.
2
To be sure you take maximum advantage of all the features the AVR-3806 has to offer, read
these instructions carefully and use the set properly. Be sure to keep this manual for future
reference should any questions or problems arise.
“SERIAL NO.
PLEASE RECORD UNIT SERIAL NUMBER ATTACHED TO THE REAR OF THE CABINET FOR
FUTURE REFERENCE”
MEMO
2
Getting Started Getting Started
Accessories
Check that the following parts are included in addition to the main unit:
q Operating instructions ............................1
w Warranty (for North America model only)...1
e Service station list ..................................1
r Power supply cord..................................1
t Remote control unit (RC-1024)...............1
r
t
yuio
y LR6/AA alkaline batteries........................2
u AM loop antenna ....................................1
i FM indoor antenna .................................1
o Setup microphone (DM-S205) ................1
Before using
Pay attention to the following before using this
unit:
• Moving the unit
To prevent short-circuits or damaged wires in
the connection cables, always unplug the power
supply cord and disconnect the connection
cables between all other audio components
when moving the unit.
• Before turning the power switch on
Check once again that all connections are
correct and that there are not problems with
the connection cables. Always set the power
switch to the standby position before
connecting and disconnecting connection
cables.
• Store these instructions in a safe place.
After reading, store this instructions along with
the warranty card in a safe place.
• Note that the illustrations in these
instructions may differ from the actual unit
for explanation purposes.
Advanced Setup – Part 1
Navigating through the System Setup Menu····················61
On screen display and front display ···································62
Audio Input Setup
Setting the Digital In Assignment·········································63
Setting the DENON LINK ·····················································63
Setting the EXT. IN Setup···············································63, 64
Setting the Input Function Level ··········································64
Setting the Function Rename···············································64
Tuner Presets ·································································65, 66
Video Setup
Setting the HDMI In Assign ···········································66, 67
Setting the Component In Assign ········································67
Setting the Video Convert ····················································67
Setting the HDMI Out Setup··········································67, 68
Setting the Audio Delay························································68
Setting the On Screen Display (OSD) ····························68, 69
Advanced Playback
Setting the 2ch Direct / Stereo·············································69
Setting the Dolby Digital Setup ············································70
Setting the Auto Surround Mode ·········································70
Setting the Manual EQ Setup ········································70, 71
Procedure for copying the “Flat” correction curve ··············71
Option setup
Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment·····························72
Setting the Volume Control ············································72, 73
Setting the Trigger Out···················································73, 74
Setup Lock············································································74
Advanced Setup – Part 2
Speaker Setup
Setting the type of speakers ················································75
Setting the low frequency distribution ·································76
Setting the Distance·······················································76, 77
Setting the Channel Level ··············································77, 78
Setting the Crossover Frequency·········································78
Setting the crossover frequency individually
for the different channels ·····················································79
Selecting the surround speakers for the
different surround modes·····················································79
Others Setup
Setting the Room EQ Setup·················································80
Setting the Direct Mode Setup ············································80
Setting the MIC Input Select················································80
Check the parameter····························································81
System setup items and default values·······················82~84
Troubleshooting ······························································85, 86
Additional Information···················································87
~99
Specifications ······································································100
List of preset codes ····································End of this manual
3
Getting Started Getting Started
Cautions on handling
• Switching the input source when input terminals are not connected.
A clicking noise may be produced if the input source is switched when nothing is connected to
the input terminals. If this happens, either turn down the MASTER VOLUME control knob or
connect components to the input terminals.
• Muting of PRE OUT terminals, PHONES jack and SPEAKER terminals.
The PRE OUT terminals, PHONES jack and SPEAKER terminals include a muting circuit. Because
of this, the output signals are greatly attenuated for several seconds after the power switch is
turned on or the input source, surround mode or any other set-up is changed. If the volume is
turned up during this time, the output will be very high after the muting circuit stops functioning.
Always wait until the muting circuit turns off before adjusting the volume.
• Whenever the power switch is in the STANDBY state, the unit is still connected to AC line
voltage.
Please be sure to turn off the power switch or unplug the cord when you leave home for,
say, a vacation.
Preparing the remote control unit
The included remote control unit (RC-1024) can be used to operate not only the AVR-3806 but other
remote control compatible DENON components as well. In addition, the memory contains the
control signals for other remote control units, so it can be used to operate non-DENON remote
control compatible products.
Cautions on installation
Noise or disturbance of the picture may be
generated if this unit or any other electronic
equipment using microprocessors is used near
a tuner or TV.
If this happens, take the following steps:
• Install this unit as far away as possible
from the tuner or TV.
• Run the antenna wires from the tuner or
TV away from this unit’s power supply cord
and input/output connection cables.
• Noise or disturbance tends to occur
particularly when using indoor antennas or
300 Ω/ohms feeder wires. We
recommend using outdoor antennas
and 75 Ω/ohm coaxial cables.
Wall
Note
Note:
For heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined space such as a bookcase or similar
enclosure.
Operating range of the remote control unit
30°
30°
Approx. 23 feet/7 m
• Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor on the main unit as shown in the diagram.
• The remote control unit can be used from a straight distance of approximately 23 feet/7 meters
from the main unit, but this distance will be shorter if there are obstacles in the way or if the
remote control unit is not pointed directly at the remote sensor.
• The remote control unit can be operated at a horizontal angle of up to 30 degrees with respect
to the remote sensor.
NOTE:
• It may be difficult to operate the remote control
unit if the remote sensor is exposed to direct
sunlight or strong artificial light.
• Do not press buttons on the main unit and
remote control unit simultaneously. Doing so
may result in malfunction.
• Neon signs or other devices emitting pulse-
type noise nearby may result in malfunction,
so keep the set as far away from such devices
as possible.
Inserting the batteries
q Remove the remote control unit’s rear
cover.
w Set two LR6/AA batteries in the battery
compartment in the indicated direction.
e Put the rear cover back on.
Notes on batteries:
• Replace the batteries with new ones if the set
does not operate even when the remote
control unit is operated nearby the unit. (The
included batteries are only for verifying
operation.)
• When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so
in the proper direction, following the “<” and
“>” marks in the battery compartment.
• To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
• Do not use a new battery together with an
old one.
• Do not use two different types of batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or
dispose of batteries in flames.
• If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe
the fluid off the inside of the battery
compartment and insert new batteries.
• When replacing the batteries, have the new
batteries ready and insert them as quickly as
possible.
4
Display
Getting Started Getting Started
yuio!0!1!2!3!4
e
r t
q
w
q
Input signal indicator
The respective indicator will light corresponding
to the input signal.
w
Input signal channel indicator
The channels included in the input source
will light.
This lights when the digital signal is inputted.
e
Information display
This displays the surround mode, function
name or setting value, etc.
r
Output signal channel indicator
The audio channels that can be output light.
t
Speaker indicator
This lights corresponding to the settings of
the surround speakers of the various
surround modes.
y
Master volume indicator
This displays the volume level.
The Setup item number is displayed in
System Setup.
u
Multi (zone) indicator
ZONE2 mode is selected in ZONE2/REC
SELECT.
i
Recording output source indicator
REC OUT mode is selected in ZONE2/REC
SELECT.
o
DENON LINK indicator
This lights during playback in a DENON LINK
connection.
!0
AL24 indicator
The AL24 indicator lights when the PURE
DIRECT, DIRECT, STEREO, MULTI CH PURE
DIRECT, MULTI CH DIRECT, MULTI CH IN
mode is selected in the PCM input signal.
!1
Input mode indicator
This lights corresponding to the setting of
the input mode.
!2
AUTO indicator
This lights when the broadcast station is
selected in the AUTO tuning mode.
!3
TUNED indicator
This lights when an FM/AM broadcast has
been received.
!4
STEREO indicator
This lights when an FM stereo broadcast has
been received.
Part names and functions
Front panel
For details on the functions of these parts, refer to the pages given in parentheses ( ).
#7#7
#6#6
#5#5
#4#4
#3#3 #2#2
#1#1
#0#0
@9@9
@8@8
@7@7
!4 !2 !1 !0!3@0
#7
#6
!9
#5
#4
#3 #2
#1
#0
@9
@8
@7
q w e r
t
u i o
@1
@2
@3
@4 @6
@5
#8
y
!5
!8
!7
!6
q
Power ON/STANDBY switch ··············(10)
w
Power indicator····································(10)
e
Power switch ·································(10, 60)
r
Headphones jack (PHONES) ···············(28)
t
V.AUX INPUT terminals ······················(17)
y
SETUP MIC jack ···································(10)
u
USER MODE 1 button ·························(38)
i
USER MODE 2 button ·························(38)
o
USER MODE 3 button ·························(38)
!0
Master volume control knob ··············(27)
!1
Master volume indicator·····················(27)
!2
Display
!3
Remote control sensor··························(3)
!4
FUNCTION knob···································(27)
!5
SOURCE button ···································(27)
!6
TUNING PRESET button ·····················(44)
!7
ZONE2/3/REC SELECT button······(58, 60)
!8
VIDEO SELECT button·························(28)
!9
MultEQ XT indicator····························(30)
@0
NIGHT indicator ···································(34)
@1
INPUT MODE button ···························(28)
@2
ANALOG button···································(30)
@3
EXT. IN button······································(28)
@4
SYSTEM SETUP button ······················(11)
@5
CURSOR button ···································(11)
@6
SURROUND BACK button ··················(33)
@7
ROOM EQ button·································(30)
@8
STATUS button ····································(29)
@9
DIMMER button ···································(29)
#0
TONE DEFEAT button··························(42)
#1
SURROUND PARAMETER button ······(33)
#2
CH SELECT/ENTER button ·················(42)
#3
DSP SIMULATION button ···················(40)
#4
7CH STEREO button ····························(40)
#5
STANDARD button ······························(27)
#6
DIRECT/STEREO button······················(32)
#7 PURE DIRECT button···························(32)
#8 NIGHT button·······································(34)
5
Getting Started Getting Started
Remote control unit
Surround mode/System
buttons·················(27, 47)
Mode selector buttons
····································(47)
IR segment
····································(49)
ROOM EQ button
····································(30)
SYSTEM SETUP button
····································(11)
Cursor buttons
····································(10)
SURROUND
PARAMETER/SEARCH
button···················(33, 46)
Tuner system buttons
····································(43)
Mode selector button
····································(47)
Remote control signal
transmitter···················(3)
Input mode selector
buttons·······················(28)
NIGHT button
····································(34)
SPEAKER button
····································(28)
TEST TONE button
····································(78)
Tuner system buttons
····································(43)
CH SELECT/ENTER
button
····························
(42)
Power buttons
····································(10)
Master volume control
buttons·······················(27)
ON SCREEN button
····································(29)
Function/Number
buttons·······················(27)
Muting button
····································(28)
User mode/System
call button············(38, 53)
VIDEO SELECT button
····································(28)
• With the AVR-3806, the “AUX” button cannot be used.
• For instructions on setting the remote control unit back light’s lighting time ( page 54).
MEMO
For details on the functions of these parts, refer to the pages given in parentheses ( ).
Rear panel
q
!6
w r t
u!1!2!4 io!0
!5
!3
y
e
q
Digital audio terminals (Optical/Coaxial) ···(8)
w
Analog audio terminals·························(8)
e
Pre-out terminals ·································(25)
r
Speaker terminals··································(7)
t
AC outlet (s) ·········································(25)
y
AC inlet ·················································(25)
u
Component video terminals ·················(8)
i
Video/S-Video terminals·······················(8)
o
12V TRIGGER OUT terminals ·············(23)
!0
Remote control terminals ···················(24)
!1
RS-232C terminal ·································(23)
!2
EXT. IN terminals ·································(17)
!3
AM/FM antenna terminals··················(22)
!4
HDMI terminals ····································(20)
!5
DENON LINK terminal ·························(20)
!6
XM terminal ········································(23)
6
Easy Setup and Operation
Speaker system layout
2 Basic system layout
The following is an example of the basic layout for a system consisting of eight speaker systems
and a television monitor:
Subwoofer Center speaker system
Surround speaker systems
Surround back speaker systems
Front speaker systems
Set these at the sides of the TV
or screen with their front surfaces
as flush with the front of the
screen as possible.
With the AVR-3806 it is also possible to use the surround speaker selector function to choose the
best layout for a variety of sources and surround modes.
2 Surround speaker selector function
This function makes it possible to achieve the optimum sound fields for different sources by
switching between two systems of surround speakers (A and B). The settings of the different
speakers (A only, B only or A+B) are stored in the memory for the different surround modes, so
they are set automatically when the surround mode is selected.
AA
BB
AA
BB
SB SB SB SB
Using A only
(Multi surround speaker system)
Using B only
(Single surround speaker system)
(
SB
: Surround back speakers)
• This section contains the basic steps necessary to configure the AVR-3806 according to your
listening room environment and the source equipment and loudspeakers you are using.
• For optimum performance, we recommend using the Auto Setup function.
• If you wish, you can set the various settings manually without using Auto Setup ( page 75 ~
79).
Easy to setup flow
Easy Setup and Operation
Placing the speakers.
Connecting the
speakers.
Connecting a monitor
and a DVD player.
Starting the Auto
Setup.
Playing a DVD with
surround sound.
Auto setup flow
1) Speaker Configuration
2) Distance
3) Channel Level
4) Crossover Frequency
5) Room EQ
1) Measuring the background noise (noise in the
room)
2) Determining whether or not speakers are
connected
3) Checking the polarities of the speakers
Store the measurement result in the memory.
Connecting a microphone.
Preliminary measurement
Measurement of the speakers
in the listening position.
Check of the measurement result.
The measurement of the speakers
in the 2nd to 6th listening position
7
Easy Setup and Operation Easy Setup and Operation
2 Connections
• The AVR-3806 can be configured for 10 speaker playback using two pairs of surround speakers
(A+B) and one pair of surround back speakers as shown below.
• The output of the surround back’s power amplifier can be assigned to the multi zone or front
channel.
For details, refer to “Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment”
(
page 72).
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.
Precautions when connecting speakers:
If a speaker is placed near a TV or video
monitor, the colors on the screen may be
disturbed by the speaker’s magnetism. If
this should happen, move the speaker away
to a position where it does not cause this
effect.
NOTE:
• When using only one surround back
speaker, connect it to the left channel.
><
><
><
><><><><
><
><
IN
(
R
) (
L
) (
L
) (
R
)
(
L
)
(
R
)
(
L
)
(
R
)
Connection
terminal for
subwoofer
with built-in
amplifier
(subwoofer),
etc.
Speaker connections
• Connect the speaker terminals with the
speakers making sure that like polarities are
matched (
<
with
<
,
>
with
>
). Mismatching
of polarities will result in weak central sound,
unclear orientation of the various instruments,
and the stereo image being impaired.
• When making connections, take care that
none of the individual conductors of the speaker
cable come in contact with adjacent terminals,
with other speaker cable conductors, or with
the rear panel.
2 Speaker impedance
• Speakers with an impedance of from 6 to 16
Ω/ohms can be connected for use as front,
center, surround and surround back speakers.
• Be careful when using two pairs of surround
speakers (A + B) at the same time, since use
of speakers with an impedance of less than 8
Ω/ohms will lead to damage.
• The protector circuit may be activated if the
set is played for long periods of time at high
volumes when speakers with an impedance
lower than the specified impedance are
connected.
Protector circuit
This unit is equipped with a high-speed
protection circuit. The purpose of this circuit
is to protect the speakers under circumstances
such as when the output of the power
amplifier is inadvertently short-circuited and
a large current flows, when the temperature
surrounding the unit becomes unusually
high, or when the unit is used at high output
over a long period which results in an
extreme temperature rise.
When the protection circuit is activated, the
speaker output is cut off and the power
supply indicator flashes. Should this occur,
please follow these steps: be sure to switch
off the power of this unit, check whether
there are any faults with the wiring of the
speaker cables or input cables, and wait for
the unit to cool down if it is very hot.
Improve the ventilation condition around the
unit and switch the power back on.
If the protection circuit is activated again
even though there are no problems with the
wiring or the ventilation around the unit,
switch off the power and contact a DENON
service center.
Note on speaker impedance
The protector circuit may be activated if the
set is played for long periods of time at high
volumes when speakers with an impedance
lower than the specified impedance (for
example speakers with an impedance of
lower than 4 Ω/ohms) are connected. If the
protector circuit is activated, the speaker
output is cut off. Turn off the set’s power,
wait for the set to cool down, improve the
ventilation around the set, then turn the
power back on.
NOTE:
NEVER touch the speaker terminals
when the power is on. Doing so could
result in electric shocks.
Connecting the speaker cables
1. Loosen by turning
counterclockwise.
Either tightly twist or
terminate the core wires.
2. Insert the cable.
3. Tighten by turning
clockwise.
Connecting banana plugs
Turn clockwise to
tighten, then insert
the banana plug.
Surround
speaker
Systems (B)
Front speaker
Systems
Surround
speaker
Systems (A)
Subwoofer
Surround back
speaker
Systems
Center
speaker
8
Easy Setup and Operation Easy Setup and Operation
Monitor TV
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Y
P
B
PR
HDMI
IN
G
I
H
J
For best picture quality (especially with progressive DVD and other high definition sources), choose
the component video or HDMI connection to your monitor TV. S-Video and composite video
outputs are also provided if your TV does not have component video inputs.
NOTE:
• The component video input and/or output jacks may be labelled differently on some TVs,
monitors or video components (Y, P
B, PR; Y, CB, CR; Y, B-Y, R-Y). Check the owner’s manuals
for other components for further information.
• The COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-1 and the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-2 can be used
simultaneously.
• Audio signals are only output from the HDMI monitor out terminal when audio signals are
input to the HDMI input terminal.
• When connecting the AVR-3806 and DVD player using an HDMI cable, also connect the AVR-
3806 and monitor TV using an HDMI cable ( page 20).
Connecting a DVD player and monitor TV
• To connect the video output from the DVD player to the AVR-3806, you only need to choose one
connection type. Component video connection offers the best quality (and is required for
progressive DVD playback), followed by S-Video, while composite video offers the lowest picture
quality of the three connection types. For more information about the video up conversion
function ( page 15).
• The AVR-3806 is equipped with HDMI connectors, so it can be connected to a DVD player or
monitor TV using an HDMI cable.
• To connect the digital audio output from the DVD player, you can choose from either the coaxial
or optical connections. If you choose to use the optical connection, it needs to be assigned. For
more information about Digital Input Assignment ( page 63).
• The AVR-3806 is equipped with another set of input terminals for a non-DVD Video Disc Player
(such as laser disc, VCD/SVCD, or future high definition disc player). The above connection
guidelines for DVD also apply to the VDP input.
Audio signal flow is shown with white arrows; video signal flow is shown with gray arrows.
DVD player
S VIDEO
OUT
COAXIAL
OUT
R
L
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B
PR
OPTICAL
OUT
HDMI
OUT
R
L
R
L
G
I
H
A
C
D
J
9
Easy Setup and Operation Easy Setup and Operation
Auto Setup / Room EQ
The Auto Setup and Room EQ function of this
unit performs an analysis of the speaker system
and measures the acoustic characteristics of your
room to permit an appropriate automatic setting.
The AVR-3806’s Audyssey MultEQ XT function
has the feature that it provides the optimum
listening environment at all listening positions in
the home theater, where there are often
multiple listeners viewing programs together.
To achieve this, it is first necessary to use a
microphone to measure test tones generated
from the different speakers at the various
listening positions. All this measured data is
analyzed with a unique method to
comprehensively improve acoustic characteristics
in the listening area. For optimum effectiveness,
measurements should be performed at six
points. Move the microphone successively
within the listening area surrounded by the
speakers as shown on the diagram below to
measure the test tones. When listening to
music or viewing movies with the whole family,
move the microphone successively to the
different positions in which the members of the
family sit (“ ” on the diagram indicates the
points of installation) and measure repeatedly
(Example q). Even if the number of people
using the home theater is small, taking multiple
measurements at or near the listening positions
makes it possible to correct the sound more
effectively (Example w).
The AVR-3806’s Room EQ function offers three
correction curves: “Audyssey”, “Front” and
“Flat”. These can be selected after performing
the auto setup procedure. Details of the
different correction curves are described below.
• Audyssey:
This adjusts the frequency response of all
speakers to correct the effects of room
acoustics.
• Front:
This adjusts the characteristics of each
speaker to the characteristics of the front
speakers.
• Flat:
This the frequency response of all speakers flat.
This is suitable for multi-channel music
reproduction, from discrete music sources
such as Dolby Digital 5.1, DTS, DVD-Audio
and Super Audio CD.
2 About the main listening position
(*M)
The main listening position is the point where a
listener sits most often or the listening position
when only one person is listening.
Measurements on the AVR-3806 start from this
point. Correction for the speaker distance is set
based on this point.
Example:
w
Example: q
• To make the Speaker system settings without
using the Auto Setup function ( page 75 ~
79).
10
Easy Setup and Operation Easy Setup and Operation
Connecting a microphone
1
Connect the microphone for Auto Setup to the
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel of the unit.
2
Mount the auto setup microphone onto a camera
tripod, etc., and place it at ear height at the main
listening position in the listening room with the
sound receptor facing the ceiling.
Microphone
NOTE:
• Do not disconnect the microphone until the settings are
completed.
• Do not change the connection of speakers or the
subwoofer’s volume after performing these measurements.
When placing the microphone, adjust the height so that the
microphone’s sound receptor is at the height of the ears of
the listener.
Be sure that at the beginning, the measurement is started
with the microphone set up at the main listening position.
It is not possible to measure properly if there are any
obstacles between the speakers and microphone. Check
that there are no obstacles.
Please do not stand between or near the speakers and the
microphone during the measurements.
ENTER
ON
OFF
CURSOR
SYSTEM
SETUP
AMP
ON/STANDBY
SYSTEM SETUP
CURSOR
POWER ENTER SETUP MIC
4
Press the ON/STANDBY switch on the main unit
or ON button on the remote control unit.
• When pressed, the power turns on and the display lights.
• When pressed again, the power turns off, the standby
mode is set and the display turns off.
3
Press the POWER switch.
£ OFF:
The power turns off and the indicator is off.
In this position, the power cannot be turned on and off from
the remote control unit.
¢ ON:
The power turns on and the indicator lights.
Set the POWER switch to this position to turn the power on
and off from the included remote control unit.
1
Turn on your subwoofer.
Turn on your monitor (TV).
Turning on the power
5
Press the AMP button to select the “AMP” mode
(only when operating with the remote control
unit ( page 26)).
2
The sound is muted for several seconds, after which the
unit operates normally.
When ever the ON/STANDBY button is in the standby state,
the apparatus is still connected to the AC line voltage.
Please be sure to turn off the POWER switch or unplug the
cord when you leave home for, say, a vacation.
Set the volume to halfway and set the crossover frequency
to the maximum or Low pass filter off if your subwoofer can
adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency
Some subwoofers have a standby mode. Be sure to turn
this function off before performing the Auto Setup
procedure.
11
Easy Setup and Operation Easy Setup and Operation
Starting Auto Setup Power Amp Assign
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Auto Setup / Room EQ”, then press the ENTER
button.
• The “Auto Setup / Room EQ” menu screen appears.
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Power Amp Assign”, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the “Surround Back”, “Front”,
“Front B”, “ZONE2” or “ZONE3”.
1
Press the SETUP button.
• The “System Setup Menu” appears.
The AVR-3806 has available surround back amplifier channel. If
no surround back speakers are used in the main room, their
amplifier channels can be assigned for multi-zone use or the front
speaker‘s Bi-Amp connection. If this functionality is not needed,
skip this “Power Amp Assign” procedure and proceed to
“Preliminary Measurements”.
The message “Connect Microphone” is displayed if no
microphone is connected. If so, connect the auto setup
microphone.
3
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Auto Setup”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Auto Setup” screen appears.
When “Surround Back” is selected, the surround back
channel‘s test tone during Auto Setup will be output from
surround back speakers.
When “Front” is selected, change the setting to a Bi-Amp
mode for the front speakers.
The front channel‘s test tone during Auto Setup will be
output from the front speakers and the surround back
speakers.
When “Front B” is selected, change the setting to a second
stereo output mode.
The test tone during Auto Setup will not be output from the
surround back speakers.
When “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” is selected, change the
setting to “ZONE2” or “ZONE3”.
The test tone during Auto Setup it will not be output to
“ZONE2” or “ZONE3” (Another room).
Preliminary measurements
• This procedure is used to automatically determine the
background noise, whether or not speakers are connected, and
the polarities of the connected speakers.
• To avoid affecting the measurements, turn off the air-
conditioner or any other device that makes noise and take the
measurements with the room as quiet as possible.
• The set measures the background noise even when in the
silent state with no test tones being output, so keep as quiet as
possible until the measurements are completed.
2
Press the ENTER button.
•The “Speaker Detect Check” screen appears.
[ First screen ]
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Start”, then press the CURSOR
FF
button.
• The preliminary measurements start.
The screen shown at the below appears once the
preliminary measurements are completed.
Easy Setup and Operation Easy Setup and Operation
12
Speaker system measurement
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“OK Start”, then press the CURSOR
FF
button.
• Measurements for the first point start.
The screen shown at the below appears once the
measurements for the main listening position are
completed.
3
Check the results of the speaker detection, then
press the ENTER button.
• The second screen appears.
[ Second screen ]
4
If the check ends, press the ENTER button again.
NOTE:
• If the results are not as expected or if an error message is
displayed, select “Retry” and perform the measurements
again. (For details on the error messages ( page 13).
If the results of remeasurement are still not as expected or
if an error message is displayed, turn off the power switch
and check the speaker connections. Then start the
measurements again from the beginning.
• Measurement is cancelled when MASTER VOLUME is
operated while the Auto Setup is performed.
With these measurements, the “Speaker Configuration”,
“Distance”, “Channel Level”, “Crossover Frequency” and
“Room EQ” are analyzed automatically. The main listening
position is measured first, so leave the microphone where it is.
4
Perform step 2, 3 repeatedly.
5
After measuring at the number of points
according to your listening environment, press
the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Calculate”, then press the CURSOR
FF
button.
• The speaker system is analyzed.
The more measurement points, the better the resulting room
correction effect. We recommend 6 measurement points – 6
measurement points provides the best room correction effect.
2
Next the measurements for the second point will
be taken.
3
Press the CURSOR
FF
button.
• Measurements for the second point start.
Place the microphone at the second listening position. For
instructions on the position in which the microphone should
be placed ( page 9).
The amount of time required for the analysis depends on the
number of speakers and the number of measuring points.
The greater the number of speakers and measuring points,
the longer the time required.
Measurements can be ended when there are 6 or less
measurement locations; however, to obtain better results,
measurements at 6 locations is recommended.
Once the calculations are completed, a screen for
confirming the results of the measurements appears.
Check of the measurement result
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select an
item, then press the ENTER button.
• The verification screen appears.
Example: Speaker Config. Check
2
Press the ENTER button.
• The second screen appears.
Example: Speaker Config. Check
The results of the measured items can be checked.
[ First screen ]
[ Second screen ]
13
Easy Setup and Operation Easy Setup and Operation
Store:
Store the checked measurement values.
All parameters are stored.
3
If the check ends, press the ENTER button again.
4
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select
whether or not to save the data you have
checked.
5
Press the CURSOR
FF
button.
• After the data is stored, the “Auto Setup / Room EQ”
menu screen appears automatically.
Cancel:
Cancel the auto setup settings.
• When measurements have been made using the measurement
microphone, speakers with a built-in filter such as subwoofers
might be set with a value that differs from the physical distance
because of the internal electrical delay.
NOTE:
• Do not turn off the power while the data is being stored.
If the power is turned off while the data is being stored, the
Room EQ parameters stored in the memory will be cleared,
and it will not be possible to select the “Audyssey”, “Front”
or “Flat” equalizer settings.
Measures
Cause
Screen example
q The speakers required for producing suitable
reproduction have not been detected.
• The front L and front R speakers were not properly
detected.
• Only one channel of the surround (A) and surround (B)
speakers was detected.
• Sound was output from the R channel when only one
surround back speaker was connected.
• The surround back or the surround (B) speaker was
detected, but the surround (A) speaker was not
detected.
If multiple errors occur, press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button
to check the contents.
• Check that the pertinent speakers are properly
connected.
w The speaker polarity is connected in reverse.
If multiple errors occur, press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button
to check the contents.
• Check the polarity of the pertinent speakers.
• For some speakers, the screen below may be
displayed even though the speakers are
properly connected.
If so, select “Skip
0
”.
e There is too much ambient noise in the room and the
measurements cannot be made accurately.
r The sound level that is output from the speakers and/or
subwoofer is too low.
• Either turn off the power of the device that
generated the noise during the measurements
or move the device away.
• Try again at a time when it is quieter.
• Check the placement and orientation of the
loudspeakers.
• Adjust the subwoofer’s output level.
t The measurement microphone is not connected, or all
of speakers have not been detected.
• Connect the measurement microphone to the
microphone connector.
• Check the speaker connection.
Playing a DVD with surround sound
1
Disconnect the microphone from the unit.
2
Select the input source to be played.
4
5
Adjust the volume.
Start DVD playback.
About the error message
These error messages will be displayed when performing the measurements of Auto Setup and the automatic measurements can
not be completed because of the speaker arrangement, measurement environment, or other factors. Please check the following
matters, reset the pertinent items, and measure again. Be sure to turn off the AVR-3806’s power before checking the speaker
connections.
3
Select the play (surround) mode.
14
Connecting Other Sources
Cable indications
Signal direction
Audio and Video cable
The hookup diagrams on the subsequent pages assume the use of the following optional connection cables (not supplied).
Video cableAudio cable
NOTE:
• Do not plug in the power supply cord until all connections
have been completed.
• When making connections, also refer to the operating
instructions of the other components.
• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left
with left, right with right).
• Note that binding pin-plug cables together with power
supply cords or placing them near a power transformer will
result in hum or other noise.
NOTE:
• Connecting a LD (laser disc) player with a Dolby Digital
RF Output.
The AVR-3806 does not have a DD RF demodulator function.
Therefore, you need to use a commercially available
outboard DD RF demodulator and connect its digital output
to one of the AVR-3806 available digital inputs. Refer to the
demodulator’s owner’s manual for further information.
Analog terminal (Stereo)
A
R
L
R
L
(Orange)
Pin-plug cable
Analog terminal (Monaural, for subwoofer)
B
Pin-plug cable
Digital terminal (Coaxial)
C
Coaxial cable (75 Ω/ohm pin-plug cable)
(Yellow)
Digital terminal (Optical)
D
Optical cable (Optical fiber cable)
DENON LINK terminal
E
DENON LINK cable
Speaker terminal
F
Speaker cable
Video terminal
G
HDMI terminal
J
HDMI cable
Video cable (75 Ω/ohms video pin-plug cable)
S-Video terminal
H
S-Video cable
Audio signal
Video signal
(White)
(Red)
Component video terminal
I
Component video cable
(Y)
(PB/CB)
(P
R/CR)
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
IN OUT OUT IN
IN OUT OUT IN
Connecting Other Sources
15
Connecting Other Sources Connecting Other Sources
The AVR-3806 is equipped with a function for up and down
converting video signals.
Because of this, the AVR-3806’s MONITOR OUT terminal can be
connected to the monitor (TV) with a set of cables offering a
higher quality connection, regardless of how the player and the
AVR-3806’s video input terminals are connected.
Generally speaking, analog video connections using the
component video terminals offer the highest quality playback,
followed by connections using the S-Video terminals, then
connections using the regular video terminals (yellow).
The flow of the video signals.
This unit’s input
terminals
This unit’s output
terminals
: only MAIN ZONE 480i/576i
(Component Video
terminals)
(Component Video
terminals)
(S-Video terminal)
(Video terminal)
The video conversion function
On screen display for component video outputs and HDMI output
(HDMI terminal)
(HDMI
terminal)
(S-Video terminal)
(Video terminal)
NOTE:
• It is not possible to down-convert from HDMI input signals
to the component, S-Video or composite video monitor
output terminals.
• Video down conversion to the MAIN ZONE’s monitor output
is only possible when the component video input resolution
is 480i (interlaced standard definition video – NTSC format,
for North America) or 576i (interlaced standard definition
video – PAL format, for Europe and other countries).
• To set the video conversion function for the MAIN ZONE to
“OFF” ( page 67).
2 The analog video to HDMI conversion function:
• The AVR-3806’s video up-conversion function lets you output
analog video input signals (component – 480i/576i, 480p/576p,
1080i or 720p; S-Video and composite video - 480i/576i) to the
HDMI monitor output terminal with the original resolution.
• The on screen display signals are output from the HDMI
monitor output terminal with a resolution of 480i/576i. Because
of this, if the monitor equipped with HDMI terminal is
compatible with the 480i/576i resolution, all the signals the
AVR-3806 handles can be output to the monitor with a single
HDMI cable. The resolutions with which the monitor is
compatible can be checked using the STATUS button on the
main unit or the ON SCREEN button on the remote control unit.
• If the monitor equipped with HDMI terminal is not compatible
with the 480i/576i resolution, connect the player and the AVR-
3806 using a component cable and set the player’s resolution
to one which the monitor can handle.
• If you do not want to use the function for converting analog
video signals to HDMI signals, select “OFF” for “Analog to
HDMI Convert” at “Setting the HDMI Out Setup”( page
67).
In this case, the function for video up conversion to the
component video terminal operates.
• When viewing component video signals or HDMI signals via the AVR-3806, the on screen display is displayed on the monitor when
the “System Setup” operations are performed and when the remote control unit’s ON SCREEN button is operated.
• To view the on screen display using an HDMI monitor, set “Analog to HDMI Convert” at “HDMI Out Setup” to “ON” (default).
• When only component video signals are input to the AVR-3806, the characters of the on screen display are not displayed over the
picture.
16
Connecting Other Sources Connecting Other Sources
Connecting equipment with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface) terminals [To convert analog video signals to HDMI signals]
Monitor TV
HDMI
IN
DVD player
S VIDEO
OUT
COAXIAL
OUT
R
L
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B
PR
OPTICAL
OUT
J
R
L
R
L
G
I
H
A
C
D
• The AVR-3806 is equipped with a function for converting analog video signals into HDMI signals.
You can do this by either a component or a video or a S-Video connection.
• Audio signals are not output from the HDMI monitor output terminal, so also make analog or
digital audio connections. To play sound using digital audio connections, assign the digital terminal
(coaxial or optical) at “Setting the Digital In Assignment” ( page 63).
NOTE:
• Use an HDMI monitor compatible with an HDMI input resolution of 480i or 576i.
• If your monitor is not equipped with an HDMI terminal, connect the AVR-3806 to the monitor
using the component video, S-Video, or composite video terminals.
Connecting a TV tuner
G
H
A
TV
S VIDEO
OUT
R
L
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B
PR
R
L
R
L
I
• For best picture quality choose the component video connection to your TV. S-Video and
composite video outputs are also provided if your TV does not have component video inputs.
• To connect the digital audio output from the TV, you can choose from either the coaxial or the
optical connections. If you choose to use the coaxial or the optical connection, it needs to be
assigned. For more information about Digital Input Assignment ( page 63).
17
Connecting Other Sources Connecting Other Sources
Connecting a video camera component or video game
Video camera /
Video game
S VIDEO
OUT
R
L
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
R
L
R
L
G
H
A
D
Connecting the external inputs (EXT. IN) terminals
DVD Audio-Video /
Super Audio CD Player /
External decoder
R
SURROUND
BACK
L
R
SURROUND
L
R
FRONT
L
7.1ch AUDIO OUT
CENTER
SUB-
WOOFER
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
B
A
B
A
R
L
R
L
A
• These terminals are for inputting multi-channel audio signals from an outboard decoder, or a
component with a different type of multi-channel decoder, such as a DVD Audio player, or a multi-
channel Super Audio CD player, or other future multi-channel sound format decoder.
• The video signal connection is the same as that for a DVD player ( page 8).
• For instructions on playback using the external input (EXT. IN) terminals ( page 63).
• With discs on which special copyright protection measures have been taken, however, the digital
signals may not be output from the DVD player. In this case, connect the DVD player’s analog
multi-channel output to the AVR-3806’s EXT. IN terminals for playback. Also refer to your DVD
player’s operating instructions.
Connecting a DBS tuner
DBS / BS Tuner
S VIDEO
OUT
R
L
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
R
L
R
L
G
H
A
D
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B
PR
I
• For best picture quality choose the component video connection to your DBS tuner. S-Video and
composite video outputs are also provided.
• To connect the digital audio output from the DBS tuner, you can choose from either the coaxial
or optical connections. If you choose to use the coaxial connection, it needs to be assigned. For
more information about Digital Input Assignment ( page 63).
18
Connecting Other Sources Connecting Other Sources
Connecting a DVD recorder
DVD recorder
S VIDEO
OUT
S VIDEO
IN
R
L
AUDIO IN
R
L
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
IN
OPTICAL
IN
OPTICAL
OUT
R
L
R
L
G
G
H
H
A
R
L
R
L
A
D
D
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B
PR
I
• For best picture quality choose the component video connection to your DVD recorder. S-Video
and composite video outputs are also provided. If you choose to use the component video
connection, it needs to be assigned. For more information about Component Input Assignment
( page 67).
• If you wish to perform analog dubbing from a digital sources, such as a DVD recorder to an analog
recorder such as a cassette deck, you will needs connect the analog inputs and outputs as shown
below, in addition to the digital audio connections.
NOTE:
• When recording to a DVD recorder, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the
playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR-3806 VCR-1 (to 2)
OUTPUT terminal.
Example: VCR-1 IN → S-Video cable : VCR-1 OUT → S-Video cable
VCR-1 IN → Video cable : VCR-1 OUT → Video cable
• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 3 OUT terminal on
the AVR-3806’s rear panel to any terminal other than the OPTICAL 3 IN terminal.
Connecting a VCR
Video deck
S VIDEO
IN
R
L
AUDIO IN
R
L
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
IN
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
R
L
R
L
G
H
G
H
A
R
L
R
L
A
• There are two sets of video deck (VCR) terminals, so two video decks can be connected for
simultaneous recording or video copying.
NOTE:
• When recording to a VCR, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source
equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR-3806 VCR-1 (to 2) OUTPUT terminal.
Example: VCR-2 IN → S-Video cable : VCR-2 OUT → S-Video cable
VCR-2 IN → Video cable : VCR-2 OUT → Video cable
R
L
AUDIO OUT
CD player
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
R
L
R
L
A
C
D
19
Connecting Other Sources Connecting Other Sources
Connecting a tape deck
Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder
R
L
AUDIO IN
R
L
AUDIO OUT
CD recorder /
MD recorder
OPTICAL
OUT
OPTICAL
IN
R
L
R
L
A
R
L
R
L
A
D
D
If you wish to perform analog dubbing from a digital source, such as a CD or MD recorder to an
analog recorder such as a cassette deck, you will need to connect the analog inputs and outputs
as shown below, in addition to the digital audio connections.
NOTE:
• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 4 OUT terminal on
the AVR-3806’s rear panel to any terminal other than the OPTICAL 4 IN terminal.
NOTE:
• The phono input can accept signals from moving magnet (MM) and high output moving coil
(MC) phono cartridges. If your turntable is equipped with a low output MC cartridge, you will
need to use a separate MC head amplifier or step-up MC transformer.
• If humming or other noise is generated when the ground wire is connected, disconnect the
ground wire.
Connecting a CD player
To connect the digital audio output from the CD player, you can choose from either the coaxial or
optical connections. If you choose to use the optical connection, it needs to be assigned. For more
information about Digital Input Assignment ( page 63).
Connecting a turntable
You can connect the turntable (MM cartridge) to the PHONO terminals.
AUDIO OUT
GND
Turntable
R
L
A
Turntable
(MM cartridge)
R
L
AUDIO IN
R
L
AUDIO OUT
Tape deck
R
L
R
L
A
R
L
R
L
A
20
Connecting Other Sources Connecting Other Sources
DENON LINK connections
DVD player
DENON
LINK
E
• High quality digital sound with reduced digital signal transfer loss can be enjoyed by connecting
a separately sold DENON LINK compatible DVD player.
• Digital transfer and multi-channel playback of DVD Audio discs, Super Audio CDs and other multi-
channel sources are possible by connecting the AVR-3806 to a DENON DVD player equipped with
a DENON LINK connector using the connection cable included with the DVD player. For
instructions on playing Super Audio CDs ( page 59).
• When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected, be sure to make a
setting to “DENON LINK” with “Setting the Digital In Assignment” ( page 63).
Connecting equipment with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface) terminals
• A simple 1-cable connection (using a commercially available cable) with a device having an HDMI
(High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector allows digital transfer of the digital images of
DVD video and other sources, and the multi-channel sound of DVD Audio and DVD Video.
• To provide audio output from AVR-3806’s audio output connector, select “Amp” at the System Setup.
To provide audio output from the TV, select “TV” at the System Setup. For details, see “Setting
the HDMI In Assign” ( page 66, 67).
• With discs on which special copyright protection measures have been taken, however, the digital
signals may not be output from the DVD player. In this case, connect the DVD player’s analog
multi-channel output to the AVR-3806’s EXT. IN terminals for playback.
Also refer to your DVD player’s operating instructions.
DVD player
HDMI
OUT
Monitor TV
HDMI
IN
J
J
CC
DVD Video
Input signals
LINEAR PCM
DTS
Dolby Digital
DVD Audio
CC
LINEAR PCM
PACKED PCM
(with CPPM /
without CPPM)
CC
CC
CC
CD LINEAR PCM
EE
Super Audio
CD
Multi area
CD area
Stereo area
EE
CC
2 Copyright Protection System
To play back the digital video and audio of DVD
video and DVD audio through an HDMI/DVI-D
connection, both the connected player and
monitor are required to support a copyright
protection system called HDCP (High-
bandwidth Digital Content Protection System).
HDCP is copy protection technology that
comprises data encryption and authentication
of the partner equipment.
The AVR-3806 supports HDCP. Please see the
user’s manual of your video display for more
information about this.
The AVR-3806 is HDMI Ver. 1.1 compatible.
21
Connecting Other Sources Connecting Other Sources
• If your digital TV monitor or DVD player only supports DVI-D, please obtain and use an HDMI-DVI
conversion cable or adaptor, available from your dealer.
2 Connections with an HDMI/DVI-D conversion cable (adapter)
• The HDMI video stream signals (video signals) are theoretically compatible with DVI-D. When
connecting to a monitor, etc., equipped with DVI-D terminals, it is possible to connect using an
HDMI/DVI-D conversion cable, but depending on the combination of devices used the image
might not be output.
• When using an HDMI/DVI-D conversion adapter, the image may not be output properly due to
poor contact with the connected cable, etc..
NOTE:
• The audio signals on the multi/stereo area of Super Audio CDs are not output. If the Super
Audio CD is a hybrid CD, only the audio signals in the CD area are output.
• Use a compatible player to play DVD Audio discs that are copyright protected by CPPM.
• Among the devices that support HDMI, some devices can control other devices via the HDMI
connector; however, the AVR-3806 cannot be controlled by another device via the HDMI
connector.
• The audio signals from the HDMI connector (including the sampling frequency and bit length)
may be limited by the equipment that is connected.
• The video signals are not output properly if a device not compatible with HDCP is used.
• Use an HDMI monitor compatible with an HDMI input resolution of 480i or 576i.
• The video signals input from the HDMI input terminals are output to the HDMI monitor with
their original resolution, so the image will not be displayed if the resolutions of the input signal
and the monitor being used are not matched. In this case, change the setting of the resolution
on the source device (player) to one which the monitor can handle.
• For stable signal transfer, we recommend using cables that are a maximum of 5 meters in
length.
22
Connecting Other Sources Connecting Other Sources
1
4
2
3
2 AM loop antenna assembly
Connect to the AM
antenna terminals.
Remove the vinyl tie
and take out the
connection line.
Bend in the reverse
direction.
a. With the antenna
on top any stable
surface.
b. With the antenna
attached to a wall.
Mount
Installation hole Mount on wall, etc.
NOTE:
• Do not connect two FM antennas
simultaneously.
• Even if an external AM antenna is used, do
not disconnect the AM loop antenna.
• Make sure the AM loop antenna lead
terminals do not touch metal parts of the
panel.
An F-type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly.
Connecting the antenna terminals
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV
system installer’s attention to Article 820-40
of the NEC which provides guidelines for
proper grounding and, in particular, specifies
that the cable ground shall be connected to
the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
Connection of AM antennas
1. Push the lever.
2. Insert the conductor.
3. Return the lever.
DIRECTION OF
BROADCASTING
STATION
75 Ω/ohms
COAXIAL
CABLE
FM ANTENNA
FM INDOOR
ANTENNA
(Supplied)
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
(Supplied)
AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA
GROUND
23
Connecting Other Sources Connecting Other Sources
Connecting the XM terminal
• AVR-3806 is the XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM Satellite Radio® by connecting to the
XM Connect-and-Play
TM
(sold separately) and subscribing the XM service.
• Plug the XM Connect-and-Play antenna into XM terminal on the rear panel.
• Position the XM Connect-and-Play antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal.
For details, see “XM Satellite Radio” ( page 45).
When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Connect-and-Play
antenna.
NOTE:
• Keep the power supply cord unplugged until the XM Connect-and-Play antenna connection
have been completed.
Connecting the CONTROL terminal
This terminal is used for an external
controller.
Perform the following operation
before using an external controller
connected to the RS-232C terminal:
1. Press the ON/STANDBY switch
on the main unit and set the unit
to the operating mode.
2. Perform the operation to turn off
the power from the external
control.
3. Check that the product has been
set to the standby mode.
After checking the above, check the
connections of the external
controller. Operation is possible.
Connecting the TRIGGER OUT terminals
Turn the DC 12V voltage on and off
for the individual functions and
surround modes.
For details, see “Setting the Trigger
Out” ( page 73).
XM Connect-and
-Play Antenna
XM
24
Connecting Other Sources Connecting Other Sources
For instructions on operations using the MULTI ZONE functions ( page 56~58).
Connecting the MULTI ZONE terminals
• If another power amplifier or pre-main (integrated) amplifier is connected, the ZONE2 pre-out
(variable) and ZONE3 pre-out (fixed level) terminals can be used to play a different program
source in ZONE2 (or ZONE3) the same time ( page 56).
• The ZONE2 video out is only for the ZONE2.
• When a sold separately room-to-room remote control unit (DENON RC-616, 617 or 618) is wired
and connected between the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 (ZONE3), the remote-controllable devices
in the MAIN ZONE can be controlled from ZONE2 (ZONE3) using the remote control unit.
ZONE2 (or ZONE3) pre-out connections
NOTE:
• For the AUDIO output, use high quality pin-plug cables and wire in such a way that there is no
humming or noise.
• For instructions on installation and operation of separately sold devices, refer to the devices’
operating instructions.
• When the surround back’s power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE2 or ZONE3 output channel
at “Power Amp Assign” in the “System Setup Menu”, the surround back speaker terminals can
be used as the ZONE2 or ZONE3 speaker out terminals ( page 57).
• The connections diagram below is an example for when the surround back speaker is assigned
to the ZONE2 stereo 2 channel.
In this case, surround back speaker out can not be used for MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2 / ZONE3 speaker out connections
Power amplifier
(ZONE2)
Premain amplifier
(ZONE3)
R
L
IN
Monitor TV
(ZONE2)
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
AUX OUT
R
L
R
L
H
A
G
+
+
RC-617
INFRARED
SENSOR
RC-616
INFRARED
RETRANSMITTER
INPUT OUTPUT
Extension terminal
for future use.
Monitor TV
(ZONE 2)
Power amplifier
(ZONE 2)
Premain amplifier
(ZONE 3)
><
><
><
><><><><
><
><
IN
(
R
) (
L
) (
L
) (
R
)
(
L
)
(
R
)
(
L
)
(
R
)
Connection
terminal for
subwoofer
with built-in
amplifier
(subwoofer),
etc.
Surround
speaker
systems (A)
Subwoofer
Surround
speaker
systems (B)
ZONE2
Front speaker
systems
Front speaker
systems
Center
speaker
ZONE2
25
Connecting Other Sources Connecting Other Sources
• Use these terminals if you wish to connect external power amplifier(s) to increase the power of
the front, center, surround and surround back sound channels, or for connection to powered
loudspeakers.
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel.
Connecting the pre-out terminals
Power amplifier
R
SURROUND
BACK
L
R
SURROUND
L
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SUB-
WOOFER
R
L
R
L
B
A
B
A
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
A
Connecting the power supply cord
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
AC outlets
(wall)
Power supply cord
(Supplied)
NOTE:
• Only use the AC OUTLETS for audio equipment. Never use it for hair driers, TVs or other
electrical appliances.
• Insert the plugs securely. Incomplete connections will result in the generation of noise.
AC OUTLETS
• SWITCHED (total capacity – 120 W (1 A.))
The power to the outlet is turned on and off in
conjunction with the POWER switch on the
main unit, and when the power is switched
between on and standby from the remote
control unit.
No power is supplied from this outlet when
this unit’s power is at standby. Never connect
equipment whose total power consumption
exceeds 120 W (1 A.).
26
Basic Operation
Operating the remote control unit
Basic Operation
Playback
The RC-1024 remote control has a backlit EL display whose
contents change according to the mode or function selected,
with the appropriate remote commands for that mode or
function.
2 Operate the this unit
The AMP button is the main mode for controlling the
AVR-3806 in the main room (MAIN ZONE).
2 AMP mode
To operate the MAIN ZONE function.
2 ZONE2 mode
To operate the ZONE2 function.
2 ZONE3 mode
To operate the ZONE3 function.
2 SYSTEM CALL mode
To operate the “System call” function.
The function switches as shown below each time one of the
AMP button is pressed.
The EL display switches as shown below with respect to the
selected mode.
AMP
SYSTEM CALL
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
• This function provides the ability to program a series of
individual remote control codes into a macro stored under one
of the number pad’s numeric choices
(
page 53).
27
Basic Operation Basic Operation
2 To choose the surround sound mode
Example: Dolby Digital
Press the STANDARD button.
For more information about the surround modes ( page
33, 34).
The volume can be adjusted within the range of –80 to +18
dB, in steps of 0.5 dB. However, when the channel level is
set ( page 42 or 77, 78), if the volume for any channel is
set at +0.5 dB or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up
to 18 dB. (In this case the maximum volume adjustment
range is “18 dB — (Maximum value of channel level)”.)
Also, you may not be able to adjust the volume to the
maximum of 18 dB when internal volume compensation
control is activated due to the combination of the surround
mode and parameters, downmixing from multi-channel
audio signals into two channels, etc.
2 To select the Room EQ function
Press the ROOM EQ button.
For more information about the Room EQ function (
page 30).
SOURCE ROOM EQ
VOLUMEFUNCTION
PHONES
EXT.IN
STANDARD
INPUT MODE
ANALOG
VIDEO SELECT
FUNCTION
ROOM EQ
MUTING
INPUT MODE
STANDARD
VOLUME
VIDEO SELECT
SPEAKER
Playing the input source
1
Select the input source to be played.
Example: CD
(Main unit) (Remote control unit)
To select the input source when ZONE2/3/REC SELECT,
VIDEO SELECT or TUNING PRESET is selected, press the
SOURCE button on the main unit then operate the FUNCTION
knob.
2
3
Start playback on the selected component.
For operating instructions, refer to the component’s manual.
Adjust the volume.
(Main unit) (Remote control unit)
M.VOL. -80.0dB
The volume level is displayed on the master volume level display.
28
Basic Operation Basic Operation
Turning the sound off temporarily (MUTING)
Use this to mute the audio output temporarily.
2 Operate the video select from the main unit
2 Operate the video select from the remote
control unit
Press the MUTING button.
• You can adjust the muting level ( page 72, 73).
• Cancelling MUTING mode:
Press the MUTING button again, or press the VOLUME button on
the remote control, or adjust the volume up or down via the
front panel VOLUME knob.
Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack.
• The pre-out output (including the speaker output) is
automatically turned off when headphones are connected.
NOTE:
• To prevent hearing loss, be careful not to raise the volume
level excessively when using headphones.
Listening over headphones
Press the VIDEO SELECT button until the desired
image appears.
Press the VIDEO SELECT button, turn the FUNCTION
knob until the desired image appears on the display.
Combining the currently playing sound with
the desired image (VIDEO SELECT)
• Cancelling simulcast playback:
Select the “SOURCE” pressing the VIDEO SELECT button.
• It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.
• When playing HDMI video input signals, the analog video signal
of another function cannot be selected for the HDMI video
output.
(Main unit)
The video source selected with the video select function is
stored in the memory for the different input sources.
VIDEO SOURCE
DVD
Switching the surround speakers
Press the SPEAKER button.
The surround speakers switch as shown below each time
the SPEAKER button is pressed.
SURROUND A
SURROUND A+B
SURROUND B
This operation is possible when the setting for using both
surround speakers A and B is made at “Setting the type of
speakers” ( page 75).
• When using the pre-out terminals, set to either “A” or “B”.
Playback using the external input (EXT. IN)
terminals
Press the EXT. IN button on the main unit or INPUT
MODE
button on the remote control unit to switch
the external input.
When operating the remote control unit:
NOTE:
• When the input mode is set to the external input (EXT. IN),
the surround mode (DIRECT, STEREO, STANDARD, 7CH
STEREO, WIDE SCREEN or DSP SIMULATION) cannot be
set.
• In play modes other than the external input mode, the
signals connected to these terminals cannot be played. In
addition, signals cannot be output from channels not
connected to the input terminals.
• Cancelling the external input mode:
Press the INPUT MODE or ANALOG button to switch to the
desired input mode ( page 29, 30).
• The external input mode can be set for any input source. To
watch video while listening to sound, select the input source to
which the video signal is connected, then set this mode.
• If the subwoofer output level seems too high, set the “SW
ATT” surround parameter to “ON”.
AUTO
EXT.IN
ANALOG
PCM
DTS
The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT
MODE button is pressed:
(Remote control unit)
29
Basic Operation Basic Operation
2 On screen display
Checking the currently playing program
source, etc.
Press the ON SCREEN button.
Each time an operation is performed, a description of that
operation appears on the display connected to AVR-3806’s
VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal. Also, the unit’s operating
status can be checked during playback.
Such information as the position of the input selector and
the surround settings is output in sequence.
2 Front panel display
Press the STATUS button.
Descriptions of the unit’s operations are also displayed on
the front panel display. In addition, the display can be
switched to check the unit’s operating status while playing a
source.
2 Using the dimmer function
Use this to change the brightness of the display.
Press the DIMMER button.
The display brightness changes in four steps (bright,
medium, dim and off).
Input mode
The AVR-3806 has an AUTO signal detection mode that
automatically identifies the type of incoming audio signals, but is
also equipped with a manual mode that can be switched
according to the type of input audio signals.
2 Selecting the AUTO, PCM and DTS modes
AUTO PCM DTS
Press the INPUT MODE button.
The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT
MODE button on the main unit is pressed:
AUTO (All auto mode):
In this mode, the types of signals being input to the digital and
analog input terminals for the selected input source are
detected and the program in the AVR-3806’s surround
decoder is selected automatically upon playback. This mode
can be selected for all input sources other than PHONO and
TUNER.
The presence or absence of digital signals is detected, the
signals input to the digital input terminals are identified and
decoding and playback are performed automatically in DTS,
Dolby Digital or PCM (2 channel stereo) format. If no digital
signal is being input, the analog input terminals are selected.
Use this mode to play Dolby Digital signals.
DTS (exclusive DTS signal playback mode):
Decoding and playback are only performed when DTS signals
are being input.
PCM (exclusive PCM signal playback mode):
Decoding and playback are only performed when PCM signals
are being input.
Note that noise may be generated when using this mode to
play signals other than PCM signals.
STATUS
INPUT MODE
ANALOG
DIMMER
ROOM EQ
ROOM EQ
INPUT MODE
ON SCREEN
AUTO
EXT.IN
ANALOG
PCM
DTS
The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT
MODE button on the remote control unit is pressed:
(Remote control unit)
When operating the remote control unit:
30
Basic Operation Basic Operation
• DOLBY DIGITAL
• DTS
• PCM
Depending on the input signal.
• The “HDCD” indicator lights when digital
signals are being input with a player that
supports HDCD playback.
Depending on the input signal.
• The “DSD” indicator lights when the
DENON LINK have been connected and
the DSD signals have been inputted (
page 20).
Flat:
This the frequency response of all speakers flat.
This is suitable for multi-channel music reproduction, from
discrete music sources such as Dolby Digital 5.1, DTS, DVD-
Audio and Super Audio CD.
Audyssey:
This adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct
the effects of room acoustics.
Front:
This adjusts the characteristics of each speaker to the
characteristics of the front speakers.
Manual:
Selects the setting value that was set in the Manual EQ Setup.
For details of the “Setting the Manual EQ Setup” ( page 70,
71).
2 Input signal display
The “DIG.” indicator lights when digital signals are being
input properly. If the “DIG.” indicator does not light, check
whether the digital input component setup ( page 63) and
connections are correct and whether the component’s power
is turned on.
AL24 processing is activated when PCM signals are played
while the surround mode is set to PURE DIRECT, DIRECT,
STEREO, MULTI CH PURE DIRECT, MULTI CH DIRECT or
MULTI CH IN.
NOTE:
• The “DIG.” indicator will light when playing CD-ROMs
containing data other than audio signals, but no sound will
be heard.
Room EQ function
The AVR-3806’s Auto Setup / Room EQ function offers three
correction curves: “Audyssey”, “Front”, “Flat”. The timbre of
the speakers can also be adjusted manually using a graphic
equalizer.
Details of the different correction curves are described below.
OFF Audyssey Front Flat Manual
Press the ROOM EQ button.
• The “Audyssey” is selected, the MultEQ XT indicator lights
green.
• The “Front” or “Flat” is selected, the MultEQ XT indicator
lights red.
The Room EQ switches as follows each time the ROOM EQ
button is pressed.
The MultEQ XT indicator also lights red if the “Speaker
Configuration”, “Distance”, “Channel Level” or “Crossover
Frequency” is set manually after conducting the Auto Setup
procedure.
• The “Audyssey”, “Front” and “Flat” Room EQ curves can be
selected after performing the Auto Setup procedure.
2 Input mode display
• In the AUTO mode
• In the DIGITAL PCM mode
• In the DIGITAL DTS mode
• In the ANALOG mode
Depending on the input signal.
• In the EXT.IN mode
Press the ANALOG button on the main unit or INPUT
MODE
button on the remote control unit to switch to
the analog input.
2 Selecting the analog mode
ANALOG (exclusive analog audio signal playback mode):
The signals input to the analog input terminals are decoded
and played.
NOTE:
• Input mode when playing DTS sources:
Noise will be output if DTS-compatible CDs or LDs are
played in the “ANALOG” or “PCM” mode.
When playing DTS-compatible sources, be sure to connect
the source component to the digital input terminals
(OPTICAL/COAXIAL) and set the input mode to “DTS”.
31
Basic Operation Basic Operation
Surround
Playing modes for different
sources
The AVR-3806 is equipped with many surround
modes. We recommend using the surround
modes as described below in order to achieve
the maximum effect for the specific signal
source.
is a 6.1-channel/7.1-channel surround
mode.
Sources recorded in Dolby Digital EX
DOLBY DIGITAL EX / +PLIIx
*
1
( page 33)
• This mode is optimized for playing
sources recorded in Dolby Digital EX.
Sources recorded in DTS-ES
DTS-ES DSCRT 6.1 / MTRX 6.1,
+PLIIx
*
1
( page 33)
• This is the optimum mode for playing
sources recorded in DTS-ES.
Dolby Digital
or DTS Surround (5.1 ch sources)
2 ch sources recorded in Dolby
Surround
WIDE SCREEN ( page 39, 40)
• Effective for 2-channel sources
recorded in Dolby Surround or for
7.1-channel playback with 5.1-
channel sources.
DOLBY DIGITAL /
DOLBY DIGITAL+PLIIx
*
1
/
DTS SURROUND / DTS 96/24 /
DTS+PLIIx
*
1 /
DTS+NEO:6
( page 33)
• This mode is optimized for playing
5.1-channel or 7.1-channel music.
• For Dolby Surround recording
sources, Dolby Pro LogicII playback
is conducted.
Sources recorded in stereo
Sources recorded in monaural
PURE DIRECT ( page 32)
• By suspending all circuits and
processes not required, analog input
music playback can be played with
optimum quality.
DIRECT / STEREO ( page 32)
• Effective for achieving pure playback.
• If there is no need for tone control or
distribution of the low frequencies in
function of the speaker
configuration, select the DIRECT
mode to achieve the best sound
quality.
DENON Original Surround Modes
( page 39, 40)
• Select these for 7.1-channel
playback with sources recorded in
stereo or monaural.
• The effects are different for each of
the surround modes. Select the one
most suited for the source being
used.
DTS NEO:6 ( page 38)
• This is a surround mode for playing
6.1- or 7.1-channel stereo sources
developed by Digital Theater
Systems.
• One of two playing modes, MUSIC
(for music sources) or CINEMA (for
movie sources), can be selected
according to your preferences.
DOLBY PRO LOGICIIx
*
1
( page 36)
• Developed by Dolby Laboratories,
this surround mode provides 7.1
channel surround sound with
conventional stereo (2-channel)
sources.
• Select CINEMA mode for movie
surround soundtracks, MUSIC for
music sources, and GAME for 2-
channel game box audio sources.
NOTE:
• Surround modes marked with an asterisk
(*1) cannot be used when the surround
back speaker is set to “NONE”.
• The “+PLIIx Cinema” mode cannot be
selected when only one surround back
speaker is being used.
• Though we recommend selecting the
surround mode as described above, other
surround modes can also be selected.
32
Basic Operation Basic Operation
2 DIRECT mode
Use this mode to achieve good quality 2-channel sound. In this
mode, the audio signals bypass such circuits as the tone circuit
and are transmitted directly, resulting in good quality sound.
Playing audio sources (CDs and DVDs)
2-channel playback modes
• The system setup function cannot be used when the PURE
DIRECT mode is set. To use the system setup function, cancel
the PURE DIRECT mode.
• If the HDMI input terminal is selected, video outputs are
outputted in the PURE DIRECT mode.
• The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE
DIRECT mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode.
PURE DIRECT DIRECT/STEREO
• The AVR-3806 is equipped with three 2-channel playback
modes exclusively for music.
• Select the mode to suit your tastes.
Press the DIRECT/STEREO button to select the
DIRECT mode.
The mode switches as shown below each time the
DIRECT/STEREO button is pressed.
STEREODIRECT
2 PURE DIRECT mode
This mode reproduces the sound with extremely high quality.
When this mode is set, all circuits and processes not required for
the selected input source (FL tube, video circuit and tone control,
as well as digital circuitry and other unnecessary circuits for
analog audio inputs) are automatically turned off so the music
signals can be reproduced with high sound quality.
Press the PURE DIRECT button to select the PURE
DIRECT mode.
2 STEREO mode
Use this mode to adjust the tone and achieve the desired sound.
Press the DIRECT/STEREO button to select the
STEREO mode.
DIRECT/STEREO
PURE DIRECT
33
Basic Operation Basic Operation
STANDARD
CURSOR
NIGHT
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
PARAMETER
ENTER
Dolby Digital mode and DTS Surround (only
with digital input)
2
Play a program source with the
, mark.
• The Dolby Digital indicator lights when
playing Dolby Digital sources.
• The DTS indicator lights when playing DTS
sources.
light
light
light
light
Press the SURROUND BACK button.
Lights when the Surround Back CH is on.
3
Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button.
• The surround parameter menu is displayed.
4
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
parameter.
5
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
setting.
6
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER
button to complete the setting.
1
Press the STANDARD button to select the
“STANDARD (Dolby/DTS Surround)” mode.
• When “Default” is selected and the CURSOR
FF
button is
pressed, “CINEMA EQ.” and “D.COMP.” are automatically
turned off, “LFE” is reset, and “TONE” is set to the default
value.
ENTER
CURSOR
NIGHT
SURROUND
PARAMETER
ON SCREEN
STANDARD
34
Basic Operation Basic Operation
• In addition, screen information is displayed in the following
order when the ON SCREEN button is pressed repeatedly:
OSD-1 Audio input signal
OSD-2 Monitor information
OSD-3 Input/output
OSD-4 Auto surround mode
OSD-5 USER MODE 1
OSD-6 USER MODE 2
OSD-7 USER MODE 3
OSD-8~14 Tuner preset stations
NOTE:
• OSD-2:
The monitor’s resolution is displayed when an HDMI
monitor is connected to the AVR-3806.
• OSD-4:
This is displayed when the auto surround mode is set to
“ON” ( page 70) and the input mode is set to “AUTO”.
It is not displayed when the input mode is set to “ANALOG”
or “EXT. IN”.
FORMAT:
Displays the input signal’s number of channels.
“Number of front channels / Number of surround channels /
LFE on/off”
“SURROUND” is displayed for 2-channel signal sources
recorded in Dolby Surround.
OFFSET:
Displays the dialog normalization offset value.
FLAG:
Displays the special identification signal recorded in the input
signal ( page 35).
“MATRIX” is displayed when matrix processing is conducted
on the surround back channel, “DISCRETE” is displayed when
discrete processing is conducted.
Not displayed when no identification signal is recorded.
2 Dialogue Normalization
The dialogue normalization function is activated automatically
when playing Dolby Digital program sources.
Dialogue normalization is a basic function of Dolby Digital which
automatically normalizes the dialog level (standard level) of the
signals which are recorded at different levels for different
program sources, such as DVD, DTV and other future formats
that will use Dolby Digital.
When this function is activated, the following message appears
on the main unit’s display:
Display
Offset -4dB
Dial.Norm
The number indicates the normalization level when the currently
playing program is normalized to the standard level.
2 Checking the input signal
The input signal can be checked by pressing the remote control
unit’s ON SCREEN button ( page 5).
SIGNAL:
Displays the type of signal (DTS, DOLBY DIGITAL, PCM, etc.).
fs:
Displays the input signal’s sampling frequency.
• Canceling night mode:
Press the NIGHT button again.
• The night mode only works when playing program sources
recorded in Dolby Digital.
• When the night mode is set to “ON”, the “D.COMP” surround
parameter can not be selected.
When listening at night or at lower volumes, the night mode
improves listenability.
Press the NIGHT button to enter the night mode.
• The NIGHT mode indicator lights.
Night mode
35
Basic Operation Basic Operation
TONE:
This adjusts the tone control ( page 41).
This can be set individually for the separate surround mode
other than PURE DIRECT and DIRECT mode.
2 Surround parameters q
CINEMA EQ. (Cinema Equalizer):
The Cinema EQ function gently decreases the level of the
extreme high frequencies, compensating for overly-bright
sounding motion picture soundtracks. Select this function if the
sound from the front speakers is too bright.
This function only works in the Dolby Pro LogicIIx, Dolby Pro
Logic, Dolby Digital, DTS Surround, DTS NEO:6 and WIDE
SCREEN modes.
D.COMP. (Dynamic Range Compression):
Motion picture soundtracks have tremendous dynamic range
(the contrast between very soft and very loud sounds). For
listening late at night, or whenever the maximum sound level is
lower than usual, the Dynamic Range Compression allows you
to hear all of the sounds in the soundtrack (but with reduced
dynamic range). (This only works when playing program
sources recorded in Dolby Digital or DTS.) Select one of the
four parameters (“OFF”, “LOW”, “MID” (middle) or “HI”
(high)). Set to OFF for normal listening.
This parameter is displayed only when playing compatible
sources in DTS mode.
LFE (Low Frequency Effect):
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effect) sounds
included in the source when playing program sources recorded
in Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-audio or Super Audio CD.
Program source and adjustment range:
–10 dB to 0 dB
When DTS encoded movie software is played, it is
recommended that the LFE LEVEL be set to 0 dB for
correct DTS playback.
When DTS encoded music software is played, it is
recommended that the LFE LEVEL be set to –10 dB for
correct DTS playback.
MODE/SB CH OUT:
Select the surround back channel playback method or mode.
(1) Multi channel source
• NON MTRX:
The same signals as those of the surround channels are
output from the surround back channels.
• MTRX ON:
The surround channel signals undergo digital matrix
processing and are output from the surround back channels.
• SB OFF (OFF):
No signal is played from the surround back channels.
• ES MTRX:
When playing DTS signals, the surround back signals undergo
digital matrix processing for playback.
• ES DSCRT:
When a signal identifying the source as a discrete 6.1-channel
source is included in the DTS signals, the surround back
signals included in the source are played.
• PLIIx Cinema:
Processing is performed with the Cinema mode of the PLIIx
decoder and the Surround Back channel is reproduced.
• PLIIx Music:
Processing is performed with the Music mode of the PLIIx
decoder and the Surround Back channel is reproduced.
(2) 2ch source
• OFF:
Playback is conducted without using the surround back
speaker.
• ON:
Playback is conducted using the surround back speaker.
This operation can be performed directly pressing the
SURROUND BACK button.
AFDM (Auto Flag Detect Mode):
• ON:
This function only works with software on which a special
identification signal is recorded. This software is scheduled to
go on sale in the future.
This is a function for automatically playing in the 6.1-channel
mode using the surround back speaker(s) if the software is
recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES or in the normal 5.1-
channel mode without using the surround back speaker(s)
when the software is not recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS-
ES.
When AFDM is set to “ON” and the EX/ES flag is detected
automatically, the surround mode is fixed according to the
playing program source.
In this case, the “MODE/SB CH OUT” parameter can not be
selected on the surround parameter screen.
• OFF:
When the identification signal is detected automatically and
you would like to select the surround mode freely, set AFDM
to “OFF”.
In this case the “MODE/SB CH OUT” parameter can be
selected on the surround parameter screen regardless of the
playing program source.
Example:When playing software that has a Dolby Digital EX flag
q When AFDM is set to “ON”, the surround mode is
automatically set to the “DOLBY DIGITAL + PL
IIx CINEMA”
mode. The surround parameter screen will be displayed.
w When you would like to play back with the “Dolby Digital EX”
mode, set AFDM to “OFF” and select “MTRX ON” with “SB
CH OUT”.
36
Basic Operation Basic Operation
Dolby Pro Logic
II
x (Pro Logic
II
) mode
STANDARD
CURSOR
SURROUND
PARAMETER
ENTER
1
Press the STANDARD button to select the “Dolby
Pro LogicIIx” mode.
2
Play a program source
with the mark.
4
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
play mode.
Display
MODE: PL x C
*Surr Parameter
MODE: PL x M
*Surr Parameter
MODE: PL x G
*Surr Parameter
(Pro LogicIIx Cinema mode)
(Pro LogicIIx Music mode)
(Pro Logic
IIx Game mode)
(Pro Logic
II Cinema mode)
(Pro LogicII Music mode)
(Pro LogicII Game mode)
When the “SB CH OUT” parameter is set to “ON”. (Set
“Sp.Back” at the System Setup to “1spkr” or “2spkrs”).
The mode switches as shown below each time the
STANDARD button is pressed.
For operating instructions, refer to the manuals of the
respective components.
DTS NEO:6DOLBY PLIIx
3
Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button.
• The surround parameter menu is displayed.
5
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
various surround parameters.
Example: DOLBY PLIIx music mode screen
When set with the on screen display using the remote
control unit while in the MUSIC mode, set the “” mark
to “OPTIONS 0” pressing the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button, then
press the CURSOR
FF
button.
Press the ENTER button to return to the previous screen.
ENTER
ON SCREEN
CURSOR
SURROUND
PARAMETER
STANDARD
• To play in the PLIIx mode, set “Sp.Back” at the Speaker
Configuration setting to “1spkr” or “2spkrs”.
• To play in the PLIIx mode, set “Surround Back” at the Power
Amp Assign setting.
When the “SB CH OUT” parameter is set to “OFF”. (Set
“Sp.Back” at the System Setup to “None”).
Display
MODE: PL C
*Surr Parameter
MODE: PL M
*Surr Parameter
MODE: PL G
*Surr Parameter
*Surr Parameter
MODE: DOLBY PL
(Dolby Pro Logic mode)
37
Basic Operation Basic Operation
2 Surround parameters w
Pro LogicIIx and Pro LogicII Mode:
Select one of the modes (“Cinema”, “Music”, “Pro Logic” or
“Game”).
The Cinema mode is for use with stereo television shows and
all programs encoded in Dolby Surround.
The Music mode is recommended for stereo music and
surround-encoded stereo music sources.
The Pro Logic mode emulates Dolby Laboratories’ original
Dolby Pro Logic surround decoding, and may provide better
results with older, legacy surround-encoded program material.
The Game mode is optimized for computer and/or dedicated
game box consoles, that feature stereo analog or digital
outputs. It can only be used with 2-channel stereo sources.
PANORAMA:
This mode extends the front stereo image to include the
surround speakers for an exciting “wraparound” effect with
side wall imaging.
Select “OFF” or “ON”.
DIMENSION:
This control gradually adjust the soundfield either towards the
front or towards the rear.
The control can be set in 7 steps from 0 to 6.
CENTER WIDTH:
This control adjust the center image so it may be heard only
from the center speaker; only from the left/right speakers as a
phantom image; or from all three front speakers to varying
degrees.
The control can be set in 8 steps from 0 to 7.
• There are four Dolby Surround Pro Logic modes (NORMAL,
PHANTOM, WIDE and 3 STEREO). The AVR-3806 sets the
mode automatically according to the types of speakers set
during the system setup process ( page 75).
7
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER
button to complete the setting.
6
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to adjust the
parameters setting.
Press the CURSOR
FF
button to select “Default
Yes
00
”, then parameters set to default setting.
DEFAULT setting:
STANDARD
CURSOR
SURROUND
PARAMETER
ENTER
USER MODE
ENTER
USER MODE
CURSOR
SURROUND
PARAMETER
STANDARD
38
Basic Operation Basic Operation
2 Calling the settings out
Press the USER MODE button at which the settings
you want to call out are stored.
• The indicator for the selected USER MODE button lights.
In this case, press the button and hold it in until the indicator
of the selected USER MODE button lights.
Memory and call-out functions (USER MODE
function)
• The AVR-3806 is equipped with a function for storing the
selected input source, the auto surround mode and input mode
in the memory and selecting these settings when you want to
use them.
• Three patterns of settings can be stored in the memory
pressing the USER MODE buttons.
1
The following are stored in the memory:
qq
Currently set input source
ww
Currently set auto surround mode
ee
Currently set input mode
2
2 Storing the settings in the memory
Press and hold the USER MODE button for at
least three seconds which you want to store the
settings.
In this case, press the button and hold it in until the indicator
of the selected USER MODE button lights.
DTS NEO:6 mode
Surround playback can be performed for the analog input and
digital input 2-channel signals.
1
Press the STANDARD button to select the “DTS
NEO:6” mode.
3
Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button.
• The surround parameter menu is displayed.
2
Play a program source.
4
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
play mode.
The mode switches as shown below each time the
STANDARD button is pressed.
DTS NEO:6DOLBY PLIIx
5
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
various surround parameters.
6
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to adjust the
parameters setting.
7
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER
button to complete the setting.
• When “Default” is selected and the CURSOR
FF
button is
pressed, “MODE” and “TONE” are automatically reset to the
default values and “CINEMA EQ.” is set to “OFF”.
• When playing PCM digital signals or analog signals in the
DOLBY PRO LOGICII, DOLBY PRO LOGICIIx, DTS NEO:6
modes and the input signal switches to a digital signal encoded
in Dolby Digital, the Dolby surround mode switches
automatically. When the input signal switches to a DTS signal,
the mode automatically switches to DTS surround.
2 Surround parameters e
DTS NEO:6 Mode:
• Cinema:
This mode is optimum for playing movies. Decoding is
performed with emphasis on separation performance to
achieve the same atmosphere with 2-channel sources as with
6.1-channel sources.
This mode is effective for playing sources recorded in
conventional surround formats as well, because the in-phase
component is assigned mainly to the center channel (C) and the
reversed phase component to the surround (SL, SR and SB
channels).
• Music:
This mode is suited mainly for playing music. The front channel
(FL and FR) signals bypass the decoder and are played directly
so there is no loss of sound quality, and the effect of the
surround signals output from the center (C) and surround (SL,
SR and SB) channels add a natural sense of expansion to the
sound field.
CENTER IMAGE (0.0 to 1.0: default 0.3):
The center image parameter for adjusting the expansion of the
center channel in the DTS NEO:6 MUSIC mode has been
added.
39
Basic Operation Basic Operation
VIRTUAL
WIDE SCREEN
DENON original surround modes
The AVR-3806 is equipped with a high performance DSP (Digital Signal Processor) which uses digital signal processing to synthetically
recreate the sound field. One of ten preset surround modes can be selected according to the program source and the parameters can
be adjusted according to the conditions in the listening room to achieve a more realistic, powerful sound.
Surround modes and their features
SUPER STADIUM
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
VIDEO GAME
MATRIX
Select this to achieve an atmosphere like that of a movie theater with a large screen. In this mode, all signal
sources are played in the 7.1-channel mode, including Dolby Surround and Dolby Digital 5.1-channel
sources. Effects simulating the multi surround speakers of movie theaters are added to the surround
channels.
Select this when watching baseball or soccer programs to achieve a sound as if you were actually at the
stadium. This mode provides the longest reverberation signals.
Use this mode to achieve the feeling of a live concert in an arena with reflected sounds coming from all
directions.
This mode creates the sound field of a live house with a low ceiling and hard walls. This mode gives jazz
a very vivid realism.
Use this to enjoy video game sources.
CLASSIC CONCERT
Select this for the sound of a concert hall rich in reverberations.
MONO MOVIE
(NOTE)
Select this when watching monaural movies for a greater sense of expansion.
Select this to emphasize the sense of expansion for music sources recorded in stereo. Signals consisting
of the component difference of the input signals (the component that provides the sense of expansion)
processed for delay are output from the surround channel.
Select this mode to enjoy a virtual sound field, produced from the front 2-channel speakers or headphones.
7
8
7CH STEREO
The front left channel signals are output to the surround and surround back left channels, the front right
channel signals are output to the surround and surround back right channels, and the in-phase component
of the left and right channels is output to the center channel. Use this mode to enjoy stereo sound.
10
9
6
5
4
3
2
1
NOTE: When playing sources recorded in monaural, the sound
will be one-sided if signals are only input to one channel
(left or right), so input signals to both channels. If you
have a source component with only one audio output
(monophonic camcorder, etc.) obtain a “Y” adapter cable
to split the mono output to two outputs, and connect to
the L and R inputs.
Depending on the program source being played, the effect may not be very noticeable.
In this case, try other surround modes, without worrying about their names, to create a sound field suited to your tastes.
2 Personal memory plus
This set is equipped with a personal memorize function that
automatically memorizes the surround modes and input modes
selected for the different sources. When the input source is
switched, the modes set for that source last time it was used are
automatically recalled.
The surround parameters, tone control settings and playback
level balance for the different output channels are memorized
for each surround mode.
40
Basic Operation Basic Operation
7CH STEREO
SURROUND
PARAMETER
ENTER
DSP SIMULATION CURSOR
3
5
4
• The “7CH STEREO” display changes as shown below
according to the surround back speaker setting.
• When “Default” is selected and the CURSOR
FF
button is
pressed, “CINEMA EQ.” and “D.COMP.” are automatically
turned off, “ROOM SIZE” is set to “medium”, “EFFECT
LEVEL” to “10”, “DELAY TIME” to “30 ms” and “LFE” to “0
dB”.
• The “ROOM SIZE” expresses the expansion effect for the
different surround modes in terms of the size of the sound
field, not the actual size of the listening room.
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
various surround parameters.
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER
button to complete the setting.
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to adjust the
parameter settings.
DSP surround simulation
1
2
Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button.
• The surround parameter menu is displayed.
The surround mode switches in the following order each
time the DSP SIMULATION button is pressed:
The screen for the selected surround mode appears.
Select the surround mode for the input channel.
Example: DSP surround simulation mode
Example: 7CH STEREO mode
(Remote control unit)
(Remote control unit)
WIDE SCREEN
JAZZ CLUB
SUPER STADIUM
ROCK ARENA
MATRIX
VIDEO GAME
CLASSIC CONCERT
MONO MOVIE
VIRTUAL
DISPLAY
SURROUND
BACK SPEAKER
ON
OFF
7CH STEREO
5CH STEREO
ENTER
7CH STEREO
CURSOR
SURROUND
PARAMETER
DSP SIMULATION
41
Basic Operation Basic Operation
2 Surround parameters r
EFFECT:
This parameter turns the effect signals with multi surround
mode speaker effects on and off in the WIDE SCREEN mode.
When this parameter is turned off, the SBL and SBR channel
signals are equivalent to the SL and SR channels, respectively.
LEVEL:
This parameter sets the strength of the effect signals in the
WIDE SCREEN mode. It can be set in 15 steps, from “1” to
“15”. Set this to a low level if the positioning or phase of the
surround signals sounds unnatural.
ROOM SIZE:
This sets the size of the sound field.
There are five settings: “small”, “med.s” (medium-small),
“medium”, “med.l” (medium-large) and “large”. “small”
recreates a small sound field, “large” a large sound field.
SB CH OUT
• ON:
Playback is conducted using the surround back speaker.
• OFF:
Playback is conducted without using the surround back
speaker.
NOTE:
This operation can be performed directly pressing the
SURROUND BACK button on the main unit’s panel.
EFFECT LEVEL:
This sets the strength of the surround effect.
The level can be set in 15 steps from 1 to 15. Lower the level
if the sound seems distorted.
DELAY TIME:
The delay time can be set within the range of 0 to 300 ms only
in the matrix mode.
Subwoofer ON/OFF:
The subwoofer output can be controlled directly.
SW ATT:
This is the parameter for reducing the level of the subwoofer
channel when playing in the EXT. IN input mode. Depending on
the player you are using, the subwoofer channel’s playback
level may seem too high. If so, set “SW ATT” to “ON”.
For DENON players, use with the default settings (“OFF”).
CURSOR
SURROUND
PARAMETER
ENTER
TONE DEFEAT
Tone control setting
• Use the tone control setting to adjust the bass and treble as
desired.
• The tone control function will not work in the PURE DIRECT or
DIRECT mode.
1
Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button.
• The surround parameter menu is displayed.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“TONE”.
2 Adjusting the tone
The screen selected surround mode appears.
3
Press the CURSOR
FF
button.
• Switch to the “Tone Control” screen.
The screen selected surround mode appears.
ENTER
CURSOR
SURROUND
PARAMETER
42
Basic Operation Basic Operation
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to set the level.
To increase the bass or treble:
The bass or treble sound can be increased up to +6 dB in
steps of 1 dB.
To decrease the bass or treble:
The bass or treble sound can be decreased down to –6 dB
in steps of 1 dB.
7
Press the ENTER button.
• The surround parameter menu screen reappears.
8
Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER
button to complete the setting.
4
6
Press the CURSOR
GG
button to select the “Tone
Defeat OFF”.
5
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Bass” or “Treble”.
2 Tone defeat mode
If you do not want the bass and treble to be adjusted, turn on the
tone defeat mode.
Press the TONE DEFEAT button to turn on the “Tone
Defeat” mode.
The signals do not pass through the bass and treble
adjustment circuits, providing higher quality sound.
Channel level
You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback
sources or to suit your tastes, as described below.
1
Press the ENTER button.
• The “Channel Vol.” screen is displayed.
2
Channels which is not used are not displayed.
Press the CURSOR
DD
,
HH
or ENTER button to
select the speaker.
The channel switches as shown below each time the ENTER
button is pressed.
3
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to adjust the
level.
The adjustment range for the different channels is +12 dB
to –12 dB in step of 0.5 dB.
The sound from the subwoofer can be completely cut by
lowering the SW (subwoofer) setting one additional from
–12 dB (setting it to “OFF”).
FADER
SR
SBL
SL
SBR
FL
C
FR
SW
Fader function
This function makes it possible to lower the volume of the front
channels (FL, C and FR) or the rear channels (SL, SR, SBL and
SBR) together. Use it for example to adjust the balance of the
sound from each position when multi-channel music sources are
played.
1
Press the ENTER button.
• The “Channel Vol.” screen is displayed.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
,
HH
or ENTER button, then
select “Fader”.
The channel switches in the order shown below each time
the ENTER button is pressed.
FADER
SR
SBL
SL
SBR
FL
C
FR
SW
• When the surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” for
“Speaker Configuration” ( page 75), this is set to “SB”.
• The channel whose channel level is adjusted lowest can be
faded to –12 dB using the fader function.
• If the channel levels are adjusted separately after adjusting the
fader, the fader adjustment values are cleared, so adjust the
fader again.
3
Press the CURSOR
FF
button to reduce the
volume of the front channels, the CURSOR
GG
button to reduce the volume of the rear channels.
Example: When “FRONT” is selected
The fader function does not affect the subwoofer channel
43
Basic Operation Basic Operation
1
Set the input source to “TUNER”.
(Main unit)
(Remote control unit
in the AMP mode)
2
Press the TUNER button on
the remote control unit to
select the TUNER mode.
3
Auto tuning
Manual tuning
• When in the auto tuning mode on the FM band, the “STEREO”
indicator lights on the display when a stereo broadcast is tuned
in. At open frequencies, the noise is muted and the “TUNED”
and “STEREO” indicators turn off.
• When the manual tuning mode is set, FM stereo broadcasts are
received in monaural and the “STEREO” indicator turns off.
4
Press the MODE button to set the auto tuning
mode.
•“Auto” appears on the display.
5
Press the TUNING button.
• Automatic searching begins, then stops when a station is
tuned in.
• If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to the
“Manual tuning” operation.
Listening to the radio
TUNING PRESET
FUNCTION
(Remote control unit)
Check that the remote control unit is set to AMP or TUNER.
1
Set the input source to “TUNER”.
(Main unit)
2
Press the TUNER button on
the remote control unit to
select the TUNER mode.
3
(Remote control unit)
4
Press the MODE button to set the manual tuning
mode.
Check that the display’s “AUTO” indicator turns off.
Watching the display, press the BAND button to
select the desired band (AM, FM or XM).
When listening to the XM Satellite Radio ( page 45).
Watching the display, press the BAND button to
select the desired band (AM, FM or XM).
When listening to the XM Satellite Radio ( page 45).
TUNER
MEMORY BLOCK
MEMORY
ON SCREEN
SHIFT
CHANNEL
NUMBER
TUNING
MODE
BAND
TUNER
5
Press the TUNING button to tune in the desired
station.
The frequency changes continuously when the button is
held in.
(Remote control unit
in the AMP mode)
44
Basic Operation Basic Operation
Press the ON SCREEN button (in the AMP mode)
repeatedly until the “Tuner Preset Stations” screen
appears on the OSD.
1
Use the “Auto tuning” or “Manual tuning”
operation to tune in the station to be preset in the
memory.
Press the MEMORY button.
3
Press the CHANNEL button or NUMBER (1 to 8)
button to select the desired preset channel.
5
• To preset other channels, repeat steps 3 to 6.
A total of 56 broadcast stations can be preset — 8 stations
(channels 1 to 8) in each of blocks A to G.
Preset memory Checking the preset stations
Recalling preset stations
2
Press the TUNER button on
the remote control unit to
select the TUNER mode.
(Remote control unit)
4
Press the MEMORY BLOCK (A to G) button.
The memory block can also be selected by pressing the
SHIFT button.
6
Press the MEMORY button again.
• Store the station in the preset memory.
The preset (broadcast) stations can be checked on the on screen
display.
2 Recalling preset stations from the remote
control unit
1
2
Select the MEMORY BLOCK (A to G).
Watching the display, press the CHANNEL
button or NUMBER (1 to 8) button to select the
desired preset channel.
2 Recalling preset stations from the main unit’s
panel
1
2
Press the TUNING PRESET button.
Turn the FUNCTION knob and select the desired
preset channel.
45
Basic Operation Basic Operation
NO
3
Watching the display, press the BAND button to
select the XM mode.
4
Press the STATUS button on the main unit until
“SIGNAL” is displayed.
• The display changes as shown below according to the
receiving condition.
ConditionDisplay
GOOD Signal strength is good
MARGINAL
Signal strength is marginal
WEAK
Signal strength is poor
Loss of the signal
1
Set the input source to “TUNER”.
(Main unit)
2
Press the TUNER button on
the remote control unit to
select the TUNER mode.
(Remote control unit)
Checking the XM signal strength and Radio ID
7
Press the TUNING ª button to select channel 0
(XM000).
• The Radio ID is displayed.
5
6
Press the STATUS button until the XM channel
(ex.XM001) is displayed.
Adjust the antenna location until
“SIGNAL:GOOD” is displayed.
XM000 RADIO ID
Radio ID
CURSOR
ENTER STATUSFUNCTION
BAND
TUNER
TUNING
ENTER
CURSOR
SEARCH
TUNER
NUMBER
XM Satellite Radio
2 Introducing XM Satellite Radio
There’s a world of audio listening pleasure beyond AM and FM.
XM Satellite Radio. Select from over 150 channels of music,
news, sports, comedy, talk, and entertainment. Coast-to-coast
coverage. Digital quality sound. With all music channels 100%
commercial free.
Questions?: Visit www
.xmradio.com.
AVR-3806 is the XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM Satellite Radio® by connecting to the XM Connect-and-Play
TM
(sold
separately) and subscribing the XM service.
2 How to Subscribe
Listeners can subscribe by visiting XM on the Web at
www.xmradio.com or by calling XM’s Listener Care at (800) 967-
2346.
Customers should have their Radio ID and credit card ready. The
Radio ID can be found by selecting channel 0 on the radio.
2 A Warning Against Reverse Engineering
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse
engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated in receivers
compatible with the XM Satellite Radio system.
Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression software included
in this product is protected by intellectual property rights
including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital
Voice Systems, Inc. The user of this or any other software
contained in an XM Radio is explicitly prohibited from attempting
to copy, decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the
object code, or in any other way convert the object code into
human-readable form. The software is licensed solely for use
within this product.
Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold
separately. Premium Channel available at additional monthly
cost.
Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-
time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer
only.
All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions
subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com.
Only available in the 48 contiguous United States. ©2005 XM
Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
(Remote control unit
in the AMP mode)
46
Basic Operation Basic Operation
1
Press the
FF
or
GG
button in the XM mode.
• The current category name is displayed.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
category, and press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button
to select the channel within the selected category.
Category search
CATEGORY SEARCH
XM040 DeepTrks
CAT: Rock
XM040 DeepTrks
Channel Category
1
Press the SEARCH button in the XM mode.
Direct access of channels
2
Press the NUMBER buttons to enter the desired
channel.
For example, if you want to access channel 123 (ex.XM123)
press the Number buttons as shown below.
3
Once all number have been input, press the
ENTER button to change the channel.
If the next NUMBER button is not pressed within several
seconds, the channel automatically switches to the channel
number that was input.
XM001
DIRECT SEARCH
DIRECT SEARCH
DIRECT SEARCH
XM012
XM123
•“LOADING” is displayed while receiving the channel or
information.
•“UPDATING” is displayed while updating encryption code.
• When the selected channel is not available, “XM– – –” is
displayed.
LOADING
XM040 DeepTrks
UPDATING
XM040 DeepTrks
XM---
• Information on the artist name, song title, category and signal
level can be checked using the STATUS button on the main
unit.
• The XM Satellite Radio channels can be preset in the same
way as AM/FM band.
Please refer to “Preset memory” and “Recalling preset
stations” ( page 44).
(Remote control unit)
3
Set the input source to “TUNER”.
1
Set the input source to “TUNER”.
2
Press the TUNER button on the remote control
unit to select the TUNER mode.
3
Watching the display, press the BAND button to
select the XM mode.
Channel selection
4
Press the TUNING • or ª button to reach the
desired channel.
The channel changes continuously when you press and hold
the TUNING button.
When the artist name and song title are received, they are
displayed.
XM040 DeepTrks
Artist name/Song title
Channel name
Channel number
Advanced Operation
47
Advanced Operation
Remote control unit
Operating DENON audio components
AMP/LAST
MODE
SELECTOR
1
Press the MODE SELECTOR buttons to select the
component you want to operate.
• The icon for the selected mode flashes.
This function switches as shown below each time one of
the AMP button is pressed.
: AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3 or SYSTEM CALL
: TUNER
: DIGITAL TUNER
: SATELLITE or CABLE
: CD or CDR
: DVD or DVDR
: VCR or TAPE
:TV
Example:
Select “AMP” mode.
Select “ZONE2” mode.
Select “ZONE3” mode.
Select “SYSTEM CALL” mode.
2
Operate the audio component.
For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.
It may not be possible to operate some models.
• When a remote control code is sent, the icon for the mode of
the device to which that code belongs flashes.
• When the AMP/LAST button is pressed, it is possible to switch
between the AMP mode (AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3 or SYSTEM
CALL) and the last selected non-amplifier universal mode (TU,
DTU, SAT/CBL, CD, DVD, VCR or TV).
Default state is to toggle AMP to SAT/CBL mode.
48
Advanced Operation Advanced Operation
1. CD player (CD), CD recorder (CDR) system buttons
6, 7 : Manual search (forward and reverse)
2 : Stop
1 : Play
8, 9 : Auto search (to beginning of track)
3 : Pause
0 ~ 9, +10 : Number
2. Tape deck (TAPE) system buttons
6, 7 : Manual search (forward and reverse)
2 : Stop
1 : Play
8, 9 : Auto search (to beginning of track)
3 : Pause
0 ~ 9, +10 : Number
3. Tuner system buttons
•, ª : Tuning up/down
BAND : Switch between AM, FM and XM bands
MODE : Switch between AUTO and MANUAL
MEMO : Preset memory
SRCH : Search
SFT : Switch preset channel range
CH +, – : Preset channel up/down
A ~ G : Preset channel range
1 ~ 8 : Preset channel
SRCH : XM channel direct search
0 ~ 9 : XM channel
Default setting = CD
The preset codes of a CDR can be recorded in the CD mode
so that the CD recorder can be operated ( page 49).
It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the CD
or CDR.
To operate a DENON CDR player, preset “30626” or
“31868”. To return to operation of a DENON CD player,
preset “31867”.
Default setting = VCR ( page 51)
The preset codes of a TAPE can be recorded in the VCR
mode so that the tape deck can be operated ( page 49).
It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the
VCR or TAPE.
To operate a DENON TAPE, preset “21471”.
49
Advanced Operation Advanced Operation
Preset memory
The included remote control unit (RC-1024) can be used to
operate devices of different brands by registering the preset
number corresponding to the brand of your device.
For some models the remote control unit or the device may not
operate properly. In this case, use the learning function (
page 52) to store your device’s remote control signals in the
included remote control unit.
1
Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the
component you want to preset.
Presetting is not possible for the AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3,
TUNER and SYSTEM CALL modes.
MODE SELECTOR
NUMBER
SETUP
IR segment
2
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The top IR segment blinks twice.
Operating a component stored in the preset
memory
2
Operate the component.
For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.
Some models cannot be operated with this remote control
unit.
1
Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the
component you want to operate.
3
Referring to the included List of Preset Codes
(
End of this manual
), press the NUMBER to
input the preset code (a 5-digit number) for the
manufacturer of the component whose signals
you want to store in the memory.
•The top IR segment blinks once after each key press.
•If the remote recognizes the manufacturer’s code, the IR
segment blinks twice.
You have 10 seconds to press each digit. If it takes longer
than that, the remote “times out” and you must begin
again.
NOTE:
• Depending on the model and year of manufacture, this
function cannot be used for some models, even if the your
device is listed on the included list of preset codes.
• Some manufacturers use more than one type of remote
control code. Refer to the included list of preset codes to
change the number and check it out.
2 The preset codes are as follows upon
shipment from the factory and after resetting:
• TV, VCR .........................................HITACHI
• CD, DVD........................................DENON
• SAT ................................................RCA
DVD preset codes
41470 (default) 40490
DENON Model No.
DVD-555
DVD-755
DVD-900
DVD-910
DVD-955
DVD-1000
DVD-1200
DVD-1500
DVD-1710
DVD-1910
DVD-2200
DVD-2800
DVD-2800II
DVD-2900
DVD-800
DVD-1600
DVD-2000
DVD-2500
DVD-3000
DVD-3300
DVD-2910
DVD-3800
DVD-3910
DVD-5900
DVD-5910
DVD-9000
DVM-715
DVM-1800
DVM-1805
DVM-1815
DVM-2815
DVM-4800
• For the DVD player remote control buttons, function names
may differ according to manufacturer. Compare with the
remote control operation of the various components.
50
Advanced Operation Advanced Operation
1. DVD player (DVD), DVD recorder (DVDR) system
buttons
SRC ON : Power on
SRC OFF : Power off
6, 7 : Manual search (forward and reverse)
2 : Stop
1 : Play
8, 9 : Auto search (to beginning of track)
3 : Pause
SETUP : Setup
MENU : Menu
c, d, b, a : Cursor up, down, left and right
ENTER : Enter
DISP : Display
CH +, – : Switch channels +, –
0 ~ 9, +10 : Number
2. Satellite (SAT) tuner, cable (CABLE) system buttons
SRC ON : Power on
SRC OFF : Power off
SETUP : Setup
DISP : Guide
MENU : Menu
c, d, b, a : Cursor up, down, left and right
ENTER : Enter
CH +, – : Switch channels +, –
0 ~ 9, +10 : Number
Default setting = DVD
The preset codes of a DVDR can be recorded in the DVD mode
so that the DVD recorder can be operated ( page 49).
It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the
DVD or DVDR.
6, 7 : Manual search (forward and reverse)
2 : Stop
1 : Play
8, 9 : Auto search (cue)
3 : Pause
Default setting = SAT
The preset codes of a CABLE can be recorded in the SAT/CBL
mode so that the cable device can be operated ( page 49).
It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the
SAT or CBL.
When there are codes usable for the preset device, those
codes are sent when the buttons below are pressed. If not,
by default the DVD codes are punched through. If the punch
through setting is made after the preset memory is set, the
codes are sent with priority.
51
Advanced Operation
3. Video deck (VCR) system buttons
SRC ON : Power on
SRC OFF : Power off
6, 7 : Manual search (forward and reverse)
2 : Stop
1 : Play
8, 9 : Auto search (to beginning of track)
3 : Pause
SETUP : Setup
MENU : Menu
c, d, b, a : Cursor up, down, left and right
ENTER : Enter
DISP : Guide
CH +, – : Switch channels +, –
0 ~ 9, +10 : Number
4. Monitor TV (TV), system buttons
SRC ON : Power on
SRC OFF : Power off
SETUP : Setup
MENU : Menu
c, d, b, a : Cursor up, down, left and right
ENTER : Enter
DISP : Guide
CH +, – : Switch channels +, –
0 ~ 9, +10 : Number
TV/VCR : Switch between TV and video player
6, 7 : Manual search (forward and reverse)
2 : Stop
1 : Play
8, 9 : Auto search (cue)
3 : Pause
Advanced Operation
When there are codes usable for the preset device, those
codes are sent when the buttons below are pressed. If not,
by default the DVD codes are punched through. If the punch
through setting is made after the preset memory is set, the
codes are sent with priority.
52
Advanced Operation Advanced Operation
If an AV component is not a DENON product, or if it cannot be
operated via codes provided in the AVR-3806 remote control's
internal preset memory, or if its codes cannot be successfully
learned by the AVR-3806 remote control, then you should use the
remote control that was supplied with that AV component to
operate the component.
Learning function
1
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 5 button (9
→→ 77 →→ 55))
to select
Learning setup.
• The IR segment blinks twice, indicating the remote is in
Learning set up mode.
• To cancel the learning setup mode, press the SETUP button for
at least three seconds.
• Do not try to learn anything to the SETUP button.
3
Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the
component you want to learned.
Learning is not possible for the AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3 and
SYSTEM CALL modes.
4
Press the button that you wish to be learned.
• The display will go off and the unit will enter the learning
standby mode.
If a button that cannot be “learned” is pressed, the IR
segment lights and the learning setup mode is cancelled.
The AMP/LAST button cannot be “learned”.
5
Point the remote control units directly at each
other and press and hold in the button on the
other remote control unit which you want to
“learn”.
• The display turns on again and the IR segment blinks
twice to indicate that the code is successfully captured.
Other keys can be “learned” by repeating steps 4 and 5.
The mode can be switched by pressing a MODE SELECTOR
button.
If the IR segment displays one long flash, a leaning error has
occurred. Try repeating this step again until a successful
capture occurs.
6
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds to exit programming.
Other remote
control unit
MODE SELECTOR
NUMBER
SETUP
SYSTEM CALL
IR segment
53
Advanced Operation Advanced Operation
System call
3
Press the SYSTEM CALL button (1 to 3) you want
to register the system call.
4
Press the button you want to register.
• The IR segment blinks once after each key press.
The mode can be switched by pressing a MODE SELECTOR
button.
5
Repeat steps 4 to register the desired buttons.
Up to 32 signals each can be stored at the SYSTEM CALL 1
~ 3.
2 System call buttons
• Up to 32 signals each can be stored at the SYSTEM CALL 1 ~ 3
buttons.
• The System Call function can be used in the SYSTEM CALL
mode.
2 Storing system call signals
The accessorius remote control unit is equipped with “system
call” function allowing a series of remote control signals to be
transmitted by pressing a single button.
This function can be used for example to turn on the amplifier’s
power, select the input source, turn on the monitor TV’s power,
turn on the source component’s power and set the source to the
play mode, all at the touch of a single button.
1
Press and hole the SET UP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
1
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 8 button (9
→→ 77→→ 88))
to select
system call setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2 Using the system call function
1
Press the AMP button to select SYSTEM CALL
mode.
2
Press the SYSTEM CALL button (1 to 3) at which
the system call signals have been stored.
• The stored signals are transmitted successively.
6
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds to register the system call.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
NOTE:
• The remote control signals of the buttons pressed while
registering the system call signals are emitted, so be careful
not to operate the components accidentally (cover the
remote sensors, for example).
SYSTEM CALL
CHANNEL
NUMBER
SETUP
ON
MODE SELECTOR
IR segment
54
Advanced OperationAdvanced Operation
Setting the back light’s lighting time
1
Press and hole the SET UP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 8 button (9
→→77→→88))
to select a
setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
1
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 3 button (9
→→ 77 →→ 33))
to select
Light setup.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
3
Press the NUMBER button (1 to 5) you want to
adjust the lighting time (5 sec ~ 25 sec).
22
Lighting time
1 : 5 sec
2 : 10 sec (factory default)
3 : 15 sec
4 : 20 sec
5 : 25 sec
• The IR segment blinks twice as confirmation.
1
Press and hole the SET UP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 8 button (9
→→77→→88))
to select a
setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
1
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 9 button (9
→→ 77 →→ 99))
.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
Setting the ambient light sensor
The included remote control unit (RC-1024) has the ambient light
sensor which allows the EL display brightness to automatically
adjust depending on how light or dark the amount of
incandescent light in the room is. Default state of the ambient
light sensor is “OFF” (disable).
3
Press the ON button.
• The IR segment blinks two or four times.
Two blinks indicates that ambient light feature was disabled,
and is now enabled. Four blinks indicates that ambient light
feature was enabled, and is now disabled.
• If you want to set the brightness of the display manually, set to
“OFF” (default).
Punch through
Buttons used in the CD, DVD, and VCR modes can be assigned
to the buttons which are not normally used in the TV and
SAT/CBL modes.
For example, when the DVD mode is set to the punch through
mode in the TV mode, the DVD mode’s PLAY (1), STOP (2),
MANUAL SEARCH (6, 7), AUTO SEARCH (8, 9)
and PAUSE (3) button’s signals are sent in the TV mode. — ()
1
Press and hole the SET UP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 8 button (9
→→77→→88))
to select a
setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
1
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 8, 4 button (9
→→ 88 →→ 44))
to select
punch through setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
3
Select the MODE SELECTOR button (CD, DVD or
VCR) you want to punch through.
4
Press the button you want to punch through (1,
2, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 3).
5
Repeat step 4.
6
Press the MODE SELECTOR button(TV or
SAT/CBL) for which you want to set the punch
through.
7
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
Setting the brightness
• The brightness of the display can be adjusted in 5 levels.
• The default brightness setting is level3 (level 5 = brightest).
1
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
3
Press and hold the SETUP button to exit
programing.
• The IR segment twice as confirmation.
2
-1
For 1 brightness step increase:
Press the CHANNEL + button.
2
-2
For 1 brightness step decrease:
Press the CHANNEL – button.
55
Advanced Operation Advanced Operation
Resetting
1
Press and hole the SET UP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 8 button (9
→→77→→88))
to select a
setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
1
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 6 button (9
→→ 77 →→ 66))
.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
3
Press the MODE SELECTOR button.
4
Press the learned button you want to reset twice.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
Other key can be deleted by repeating steps 1 to 4.
2
Resetting the single learned button
1
Press and hole the SET UP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 8 button (9
→→77→→88))
to select a
setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
1
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
4
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds to clear the system call.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 8 button (9
→→ 77 →→ 88))
.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
3
Press the SYSTEM CALL button (1 to 3) you want
to reset.
2
Resetting the system call buttons
1
Press and hole the SET UP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
1
Press the MODE SELECTOR button (TV or SAT /
CBL) you want to reset.
4
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds to reset the punch through setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Resetting the punch through setting
1
Press and hole the SET UP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 8 button (9
→→77→→88))
to select a
setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
1
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
All reset function
1
Press and hole the SET UP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 8 button (9
→→77→→88))
to select a
setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
1
Press and hold the SETUP button for at least
three seconds.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Press the 9, 7, 6 button (9
→→ 77 →→ 66))
.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
3
Press the MODE SELECTOR button you want to
reset twice.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
2
Resetting all learned buttons
2
Press the 9, 8, 1 button (9
→→ 88 →→ 11))
.
• The IR segment blinks four times.
• Clear the entire system memory, which will restore the
remote control unit to the factory default settings.
Only use this if you wish to clear all customized settings and
memories and restore the unit to its out-of-the-box factory
default settings.
SYSTEM CALL
NUMBER
SETUP
MODE SELECTOR
IR segment
3
Press the 9, 8, 4 button (9
→→88→→44))
to select a
setting.
• The IR segment blinks twice.
56
Advanced Operation Advanced Operation
• When the outputs of the “ZONE2 (ZONE3)” OUT terminals are wired and connected to power amplifiers installed in other rooms,
different sources can be played in rooms other than the MAIN ZONE in which this unit and the playback devices are installed. (Refer
to ZONE2 (ZONE3) on the diagram below.)
• Settings can be made at “Power Amp Assign” in the “System Setup Menu” so that the same source as the ZONE2 (ZONE3) pre-
out terminals can be played from the speakers connected to the ZONE2 (ZONE3) speaker terminals ( page 72).
• When a sold separately room-to-room remote control unit (DENON RC-616, 617 or 618) is wired and connected between the MAIN
ZONE and ZONE2 (ZONE3), the remote-controllable devices in the MAIN ZONE can be controlled from ZONE2 (ZONE3) using the
remote control unit.
To control playback devices other than the ones above, either use that device’s remote control unit or preset a separately sold
programmable remote control unit.
Multi zone music entertainment system
• For instructions on installation and operation of separately sold devices, refer to the devices’ operating instructions.
Multi-zone playback using the ZONE2 and ZONE3 PREOUT terminals
2 When using the power amplifier as the MAIN ZONE output
• The AVR-3806 is equipped with pre-out terminals for which the volume is adjustable and video output terminals (composite and S-
Video) as the ZONE2 output terminals, and fixed output level as the ZONE3 output terminals.
[System configuration and connections example]
Using external amplifier.
AVR-3806DVD player
Input
RC-616
Monitor
MAIN ZONE 7.1-channel system
ZONE2 AUDIO OUT
(VARIABLE OUT)
SYSTEM REMOTE
CONTROL UNIT RC-1024
ZONE3 AUDIO OUT (FIXED OUT)
PROGRAMMABLE
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
RC-617
RC-617
PROGRAMMABLE
REMOTE
CONTROL UNIT
ZONE2
VIDEO OUT
C
FL FR
SL
SW
SR
B
SB
R
SB
L
B
Premain
Amplifer
Power
Amplifer
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
Monitor
: MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable
: MULTI SOURCE VIDEO signal cable
: ROOM-TO-ROOM REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
(separately sold) control line
Refer to “Connections” ( page 24).
57
Advanced Operation Advanced Operation
Multi-zone playback using the SPEAKER terminals
2 When using the SURROUND BACK amplifier as the ZONE2/ZONE3 output
• When the surround back’s power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE2 or ZONE3 output channel at “Power Amp Assign” in the
“System Setup Menu”, the surround back speaker terminals can be used as the ZONE2 or ZONE3 speaker out terminals ( page
72).
[System configuration and connections example]
Using external amplifier as the ZONE2 and using this AVR-
3806 internal amplifier as the ZONE3.
[System configuration and connections example]
Using external amplifier as the ZONE3 and using this AVR-
3806 internal amplifier as the ZONE2.
AVR-3806 AVR-3806
DVD player
Input
RC-616
Monitor
Monitor
MAIN ZONE 5.1-channel systems
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
ZONE2
AUDIO OUT (VARIABLE OUT)
MULTI ZONE
SPEAKER OUT
ZONE2
VIDEO OUT
RC-617
Power Amplifier
RC-617
SYSTEM REMOTE
CONTROL UNIT RC-1024
PROGRAMMABLE
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
PROGRAMMABLE
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
DVD player
Input
RC-616
Monitor
Monitor
MAIN ZONE 5.1-channel systems
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
ZONE3
AUDIO OUT (FIXED OUT)
MULTI ZONE
SPEAKER OUT
ZONE2 VIDEO OUT
RC-617
Premain Amplifier
RC-617
SYSTEM REMOTE
CONTROL UNIT RC-1024
PROGRAMMABLE
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
PROGRAMMABLE
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
C
FL FR
SL
SW
SR
B
B
C
FL FR
SL
SW
SR
B
B
: MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable
: MULTI SOURCE VIDEO signal cable
: ROOM-TO-ROOM REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
(separately sold) control line
: SPEAKER cable
Refer to “Connections” ( page 24).
58
Advanced Operation Advanced Operation
2
With “ZONE2 SOURCE” displayed, turn the
FUNCTION knob to select the source you want to
output appears on the display.
Outputting a program source to amplifier,
etc., in a ZONE2 room (ZONE2 SELECT mode)
• The signals of the source selected in the ZONE2 mode are also
output from the VCR-1, VCR-2 and CDR/TAPE recording output
terminals.
• Digital signals are not output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio
output terminals.
• About the MULTI ZONE connections ( page 56, 57).
• Press the MUTING button to mute the audio temporarily.
The muting level is same as set with “Volume Control”.
• Cancelling muting mode:
Press the MUTING button again, or press the VOLUME button on
the remote control unit.
1
Press the ZONE2/3/REC SELECT button to
display the “ZONE2 SOURCE” on the display.
• The MULTI indicator lights.
The display switches as follows each time the button is
pressed.
3
Start playing the source to be output.
For operating instructions, refer to the manuals of the
respective components.
ZONE2/3/REC SERECT
FUNCTION
ZONE3
ZONE2
(RECOUT)
2
With “ZONE3 SOURCE” displayed, turn the
FUNCTION knob to select the source you want to
output appears on the display.
Outputting a program source to amplifier,
etc., in a ZONE3 room (ZONE3 SELECT mode)
1
Press the ZONE2/3/REC SELECT button to
display the “ZONE3 SOURCE” on the display.
3
Start playing the source to be output.
For operating instructions, refer to the manuals of the
respective components.
Remote control unit operations during multi-
source playback
1
Select the zone which you want to operate
pressing the AMP button.
2
Press the ZONE2 (ZONE3) ON button to turn on
the zone power.
Press the OFF button to turn off the zone power.
3
Select the input source you wish to output.
When the input source is set to TUNER, the preset channel
can be selected using the CHANNEL + and – buttons on the
remote control unit.
4
The volume of the outputs of the different zones
can be adjusted with the VOLUME button on the
remote control unit.
The output level can be controlled only if the zone volume
level is set “variable” at “Volume Control” in the “System
Setup Menu” ( page 72, 73).
DEFAULT VOLUME SETTING
ZONE2 : –40 dB
ZONE3 : –40 dB
The zone volume can be adjusted within the range of –70
to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.
The ZONE3 volume can be adjusted only when “ZONE3” is
selected at “Power Amp Assign” in the “System Setup
Menu” ( page 72).
AMP
ZONE2 ON/OFF
MUTING
CHANNEL
VOLUME
ZONE3 ON/OFF
Advanced Operation Advanced Operation
59
1
Select the input source to which DENON LINK
was assigned at the “Digital In Assign” ( page
63) in the system setup.
Playing Super Audio CDs with DENON LINK
3
Start playback on the selected component.
• The DSD indicator lights.
For operating instructions, refer to the component’s
manual.
“DSD DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD
2-channel signals in the DIRECT mode. “DSD MULTI
DIRECT” is displayed when playing DSD multi-channel
signals in the DIRECT mode (SB CH OUT “OFF”).
Other function
• The DENON LINK indicator lights.
lights
(Main unit) (Remote control unit)
Example: DVD
2
Select the surround mode.
(Main unit) (Remote control unit)
Example: DIRECT
light
ZONE2/3/REC SERECT
FUNCTION POWER SURROUND MODE
NIGHT PURE DIRECT
When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT
mode, the DSD signals are converted into analog signals.
When playing in other surround modes, the DSD signals are
first converted into PCM signals. The input signal and playing
status can be checked by pressing the ON SCREEN button on
the remote control unit.
Example:
When DSD multi-channel signals are played in the DIRECT
mode
Example:
When DSD multi-channel signals are played in the 7CH
STEREO mode
ROOM EQ
ON SCREEN
DIRECT/STEREO
SURROUND MODE
DVD
60
Advanced OperationAdvanced Operation
Multi-source recording / playback
2 Playing one source while recording another
(REC OUT mode)
1
Press the ZONE2/3/REC SELECT button until
“ZONE2 SOURCE” appears on the display.
2
With “ZONE2 SOURCE” displayed, turn the
FUNCTION knob until “RECOUT SOURCE”
appears on the display.
• The “REC” indicator lights.
1
Switch off the unit using the main unit’s POWER
switch.
2
Hold the following PURE DIRECT button and
NIGHT button, and turn the main unit’s POWER
switch on.
3
With “RECOUT SOURCE” displayed, turn the
FUNCTION knob to select the source you wish to
record.
4
Set the recording mode.
For operating instructions, refer to the manual of the
component on which you want to record.
RECOUT SOURCE
DVD
• To cancel, turn the FUNCTION knob and select “SOURCE”.
• Recording sources other than digital inputs selected in the REC
OUT mode are also output from the ZONE2 preout terminals.
• Digital signals are not output from the analog REC OUT
terminals.
• When the REC OUT mode is selected, the ZONE2 button on the
remote control unit cannot be operated.
• If step 3 does not work, start over from step 1.
• If the microprocessor has been reset, all the settings are reset
to the default values (the values set upon shipment from the
factory).
Last function memory
• This unit is equipped with a last function memory which stores
the input and output setting conditions as they were
immediately before the power is switched off.
This function eliminates the need to perform complicated
resetting when the power is switched on.
• The unit is also equipped with a back-up memory. This function
provides approximately one week of memory storage from
when the main unit’s power switch is off and with the power
supply cord disconnected.
Initialization of the microprocessor
• In very rare instances, the AVR-3806 internal microprocessor
might lock up, or otherwise cause mis-operation. This might be
caused due to an AC line surge or line spike noise, or by static
electric discharge on or nearby the unit, or to connected
components. If the condition cannot be corrected by powering
off the unit, including disconnection of the power supply cord
for a period of ten minutes and subsequent re-connection, then
the unit may have to be re-initialized. Doing so will restore the
microprocessor to its original out-of-the-box state, with all
custom memories and settings erased, and the original factory
default settings restored. Only use this procedure if you are
sure that the microprocessor requires re-initialization.
3
Check that the entire display is flashing with an
interval of about 1 second, and release your
fingers from the 2 buttons.
• The microprocessor will be initialized.
61
Advanced Setup – Part 1
Advanced Setup – Part 1
You can customize a variety of system setup so that it may be fitting for your listening environment.
For the contents of a system menu and the initial setting of this unit ( page 82 ~ 84).
You can change setting using the buttons on the front panel or remote control unit.
Navigating through the System Setup Menu
CURSORF ENTER
CURSORD
CURSORHSYSTEM SETUP CURSORG
1
Press the AMP button on the remote control
unit.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the selected
menu.
2
Press the SETUP button to display “System
Setup Menu”.
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
menu, then press the ENTER button.
5
Press the ENTER button to set the new settings.
6
Press the SETUP button to return “System Setup
Menu”, and again to return the main screen.
4
To change a setting, first select it pressing the
CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button, and then change the
setting pressing the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button.
Audio In Setup
*System Setup
[ On screen display ]
[ Display ]
2
3
4
6
Digital In
*Audio In Setup
CD : COAX1
*Digital In
Exit
*System Setup
ENTER
CURSOR
CURSOR
CURSOR
AMP
F
F
F
CURSOR
F
SYSTEM SETUP
62
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
The AVR-3806 is equipped with an intuitive and easy-to-understand on screen display, and is
equipped with an alpha-numeric front panel display tube that can also be used to check and adjust
settings. We recommend that you use the on screen display when you make system
adjustments. Some representative front panel and on screen display examples are shown below.
On screen display and front display
[ On screen display ]
Top menu
Main menu
[ Front display ]
Auto Set/RoomEQ
*System Setup
Top menu
No.
Screen title
Sub-menu title
Speaker Setup
*System Setup
To select a menu, press
the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button.
Digital In
*Audio In Setup
Main menu
No.
Screen title
Sub-menu title
Start
*Auto Setup
Press the CURSOR
FF
button to execute.
Currently selected line
CD : COAX1
*Digital In
Current setting
The settings are changed
with the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button.
Currently selected line
Meters : Feet
*Distance
Select either one pressing
the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button.
Default : Yes
Rename DVD
Press the CURSOR
FF
button
to select “Default”.
63
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
Make the audio-related settings.
Audio Input Setup
Setting the Digital In Assignment
This setting assigns the digital input terminals of the AVR-3806
for the different input sources.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select
“Audio Input Setup” at the “System Setup
Menu”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Audio Input Setup” menu screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select
“Digital In Assign”, then press the ENTER
button.
• The “Digital In Assign” menu screen appears.
4
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Audio Input Setup” menu reappears.
3
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
input source, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the digital input terminal.
Select from among COAX 1 to 2, OPT 1 to 5.
If the same digital input terminal is selected, the setting for
the input source that was previously assigned switches to
“OFF”.
The HDMI input terminal is displayed when it is assigned to
the input source at “HDMI In Assign” ( page 66, 67).
If “Yes ” is selected for “Default”, the settings are
automatically reset to the default values.
• The OPTICAL 3 and 4 terminals on the AVR-3806’s rear panel
are equipped with an optical digital output terminal for
recording digital audio signals to a CD recorder, MD recorder, or
other digital audio recording deck. Use this for digital recording
between a digital audio source (stereo – 2 channel) and a digital
audio recorder.
•“PHONO” and “TUNER” cannot be selected on the “Digital In
Assign” screen.
Setting the DENON LINK
• When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been
connected, be sure to make a setting to “DENON LINK” with
“Setting the Digital In Assignment”.
• When the input mode is AUTO and the signals are not be able
to transferred by DENON LINK, the unit automatically changes
over the input to the selected signals (ANALOG or EXT. IN ).
• Refer to “DENON LINK connections” ( page 20).
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
input source, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the “DLINK”.
Select the input for the playback of signals that cannot be
transferred by DENON LINK.
Setting the EXT. IN Setup
• Set the method of playback of the analog input signal
connected to the EXT. IN (8CH) terminals.
• Refer to “Connecting the external inputs (EXT. IN) terminals”
( page 17).
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“DLINK” setting, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the input signal (ANALOG or
EXT. IN).
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“EXT. IN Setup” at the “Audio Input Setup”
menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “EXT. IN Setup” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
item to be set, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the parameter.
Surr. Sp:
Presets the surround speakers that are used in the EXT. IN
mode. Select according to the specifications of the player
being used. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.
• Surr. A:
Select when using surround speakers A.
• Surr. B:
Select when using surround speakers B.
• Surr. A+B:
Select when using both surround speakers A and B.
64
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
SW Level:
Sets the playback level of the analog signal that was input to
the EXT. IN subwoofer terminal.
Select according to the specifications of the player being
used. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.
+15dB (default) recommended. (0, +5, +10 and +15 can be
selected.)
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Audio Input Setup” menu reappears.
Setting the Input Function Level
• Correct the playback level of the different input sources.
• Adjust the playback levels of the devices connected to the
different input sources to the same level to eliminate the need
for adjusting the main volume each time the input source is
switched.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Input Function Lev.” at the “Audio Input
Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Input Function Lev.” screen appears.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Audio Input Setup” menu reappears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
input source, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to adjust the level.
The level can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in
units of 1 dB.
If “Yes ” is selected for “Default”, the settings are
automatically reset to the default values.
Setting the Function Rename
The names of the input sources displayed on the front display
and on the on screen display can be changed. The names or
brands of the devices connected to the input sources can be
input.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Function Rename” at the “Audio Input Setup”
menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Function Rename” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
input source whose name you want to change,
then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button.
• The screen switches to the character input screen.
Example: When “DVD” is selected and the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button is pressed
3
• After completing this setting, check that the playback levels for
the different sources are the same.
• When the input source is selected, the display is as shown
below.
Example: When the name has been changed to “DVD-5910”
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to move the
cursor (
22
) to the character, number, symbol or
punctuation mark you wish to input, and press
the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select that
character.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
! ” # % & ’ ( )
*
+ , – . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
Up to 8 characters can be input.
4
Repeat step 3 to input the input source name.
If you wish to set the input source back to as it was
initially, press the CURSOR
HH
button with the input source
highlighted.
If “Yes ” is selected for “Default”, the setting are
automatically reset to the default name.
5
Once all the characters have been input, press
the ENTER button.
• The “Function Rename” screen reappears.
Use the same procedure to change other input source
names as well.
6
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Audio Input Setup” menu reappears.
65
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
Tuner Presets
2 Auto Preset Memory
Use this to automatically search for FM broadcasts and store up
to 56 stations at preset channels A1 to 8, B1 to 8, C1 to 8, D1 to
8, E1 to 8, F1 to 8 and G1 to 8.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Tuner Presets” at the “Audio Input Setup”
menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Tuner Presets” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Auto Preset Memory”, then press the ENTER
button.
• The to the “Auto Preset Memory” screen appears.
3
Press the CURSOR
FF
button to select the “Yes”.
•“Search” flashes on the screen and searching begins.
•“Completed” appears once searching is completed.
• The display automatically switches to the “Tuner
Presets” screen.
2 Preset Skip
When selecting preset channels pressing the PRESET button, it
is possible to skip specific preset channels.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Preset Skip” at the “Tuner Presets” screen, then
press the ENTER button.
• The “Preset Skip ”screen appears.
3
When the CURSOR
HH
button is pressed at the
very bottom of the screen.
• The screen for the next preset memory block appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
preset channel you want to skip, then press the
CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the “ON” or
“OFF”.
• If an FM station cannot be preset automatically due to poor
reception, use the “Manual tuning” operation ( page 43) to
tune in the station, then preset it using the manual “Preset
memory” operation ( page 44).
It is also possible to select the desired preset memory
block by selecting “Block” then pressing the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button.
2 Preset Name
It is possible to input station names , etc., for preset channels
(except the XM channel). These names are displayed on the
front display and on the on screen display.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Preset Name” at the “Tuner Presets” screen,
then press the ENTER button.
• The “Preset Name” screen appears.
Up to 8 characters can be input.
5
Press the ENTER button.
• The “Tuner Presets” screen reappears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
preset channel whose name you want to change,
then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button.
• The screen switches to the character input screen.
Example: When “A1” is selected and the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button is pressed
3
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to move the
cursor (
22
) to the character, number, symbol or
punctuation mark you wish to input, and press
the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select that
character.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y
Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
! ” # % & ’ ( )
*
+ , – . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
66
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
4
Repeat step 3 to input the preset channel name.
If you wish to set the preset channel name back to as it
was initially, press the CURSOR
HH
button with the preset
channel name highlighted.
If the same digital input terminal is selected, the setting for
the input source that was previously assigned switches to
“OFF”.
If “Yes ” is selected for “Default”, the setting are
automatically reset to the default name.
5
Once all the characters have been input,
press the ENTER
button.
• The “Preset Name” screen reappears.
Use the same procedure to change other input source
names as well.
3
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
input source, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the input terminal.
Select from among HDMI1 to 2.
If the same HDMI input terminal is selected, the setting for
the input source that was previously assigned switches to
“NONE”.
It is also possible to select the desired preset memory
block by selecting “Block” then pressing the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button.
6
When the CURSOR
HH
button is pressed at the
very bottom of the screen.
• The screen for the next preset memory block appears.
7
Press the ENTER button.
• The “Tuner Presets” screen reappears.
8
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Audio Input Setup” menu reappears.
9
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select
“Exit”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “System Setup Menu” reappears.
Make the video-related settings.
Video Setup
Setting the HDMI In Assign
• This setting assigns the HDMI input terminals for different
input sources.
• Set the method for playing the audio signals included in the
HDMI input signal.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Video Setup” at the “System Setup Menu”,
then press the ENTER button.
• The “Video Setup” menu screen appears.
4
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
method for playing the audio signals included in
the HDMI input signal, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the “TV” or “AMP”.
5
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
input for the playback of signals when the audio
signal of HDMI can not be reproduced, then
press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
input signal (ANALOG or EXT. IN).
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“HDMI In Assign”, then press the ENTER
button.
• The “HDMI In Assign” screen appears.
TV:
Play the audio signals on a monitor TV connected to the
AVR-3806.
AMP:
Play the audio signals on speakers connected to the AVR-
3806.
When the audio signal of HDMI has become unlocked, the
unit automatically changes over to the set connector
(ANALOG or EXT. IN).
1~2 correspond to each HDMI 1~2 input terminal.
67
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
6
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting..
• The “Video Setup” menu reappears.
• If a monitor is connected with an HDMI cable but the monitor
is not compatible with HDMI audio signal playback, only the
video signals are output to the monitor from the AVR-3806 (DVI
mode).
Press the STATUS button to check which mode is set for
outputting HDMI signals from the AVR-3806 (HDMI and DVI
modes).
• Input signals input from the analog and digital terminals are not
output to the TV.
• With HDMI, the video and audio signals are transferred
simultaneously. When HDMI is assigned to an input source, the
digital audio input assignment switches to HDMI along with the
video input.
When this setting is made for input sources to which a digital
audio input (DENON LINK, OPTICAL etc.) is previously
assigned, the digital audio assignment is set to HDMI.
In this case, reassign the digital input using the procedure
described at “Digital In Assign” ( page 63) .
• Down-converting from the component video signal to the S-
Video and composite video signal is possible only when the
resolution of a component video signal is 480i / 576i.
• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or
some other source is input, the video conversion function
might not operate. If this happens, please set the conversion
mode to OFF.
• When the video conversion function has been used,
information such as that of text broadcasts which has been
added to the video signal might not be output. If this happens,
please set the conversion mode to OFF.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
input source, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the component video input
terminal.
Select from among 1-RCA to 3-RCA.
If the same component video input terminal is selected,
the setting for the input source that was previously
assigned switches to “NONE”.
If “Yes ” is selected for “Default”, the settings are reset to
the default values.
Setting the Component In Assign
This setting assigns the component video input terminal of the
AVR-3806 for the different input sources.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Component In Assign” at the “Video Setup”
menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Component In Assign” screen appears.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Video Setup” menu reappears.
Setting the Video Convert
Set whether or not to use the video conversion function.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Video Convert” at the “Video Setup” menu,
then press the ENTER button.
• The “Video Convert” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
input source, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the “ON” or “OFF”.
ON:
The convert function operates.
When there are multiple input signals, the input signals
are detected and the input signal to be output from the
video monitor output terminal is selected automatically in
the following order: component video, S-Video,
composite video.
OFF:
The convert function does not operate.
The video signal input from the video input terminal is
only output to the video monitor out terminal.
The S-Video signal input from the S-Video input terminal
is only output to the S-Video monitor out terminal.
The component input signal input from the component
input terminals is only output to the component monitor
output terminals.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Video Setup” menu reappears.
Setting the HDMI Out Setup
• Set whether to use the analog video signals to HDMI
conversion function.
• When using this conversion function, set the color format and
video range of the signals output from the HDMI terminal.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“HDMI Out Setup” at the “Video Setup” menu,
then press the ENTER button.
• The “HDMI Out Setup” screen appears.
68
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
setting, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to
select the parameter.
Setting the Audio Delay
• When watching a DVD or other video source, the picture on the
monitor may seem delayed with respect to the sound. In this
case, adjust the audio delay to delay the sound and synchronize
it with the picture.
• The audio delay setting is stored separately for each input
source.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Audio Delay” at the “Video Setup” menu, then
press the ENTER button.
• The “Audio Delay” screen appears.
Analog to HDMI Convert:
• ON:
Setting for converting analog video signals into HDMI
signals.
• OFF:
Setting for not converting analog video signals into HDMI
signals.
Color Space:
• Y Cb Cr:
The Y Cb Cr format video signals is output via the HDMI
output connector.
• RGB:
The RGB format video signals is output via the HDMI
output connector.
RGB Mode Setup:
• Normal:
Signals are output via the HDMI output connector with a
digital RGB video range (data range) of 16 (black) to 235
(white).
• Enhanced:
Signals are output via the HDMI output connector with a
digital RGB video range (data range) of 0 (black) to 255
(white).
Setting the On Screen Display (OSD)
• Use this to turn the on screen display (messages other than the
menu screens) on or off.
• Sets the on screen display’s display mode.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“On Screen Display” at the “Video Setup” menu,
then press the ENTER button.
• The “On Screen Display” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
item to be set, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the parameter.
Function/Mode Status:
Set whether or not to turn on the on screen display of the
input source name and input mode when an input source
is selected.signals.
Master Volume Status:
Set whether or not to turn on the on screen display of the
main volume level when the main volume is operated.
Display Mode:
• Mode 1:
Flickering is not prevented.
• Mode 2:
Prevents flickering of the on screen display when there
is no video signal.
Use this mode if the on screen display does not appear
in the Mode 1, as may happen according to the TV being
used.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Video Setup” menu reappears.
•“Color Space” and “RGB Mode Setup” are only displayed
when “Analog to HDMI Convert” is set to “ON”.
• When connecting to an HDCP compatible monitor equipped
with DVI-D terminal using an HDMI/DVI-D converter cable, the
signals are output in RGB format, regardless of the “Color
Space” setting.
• To view the on-screen display using an HDMI monitor, set
“Analog to HDMI Convert” at “HDMI Out Setup” to “ON”
(default).
• The audio delay setting does not apply when playing in the EXT.
IN mode or in the analog input direct mode or stereo mode
(Front speaker setting “Large” TONE DEFEAT “ON” and Room
EQ “OFF”).
• By default, this menu is not displayed when no digital signals
are being input.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to set the delay
time (0 ms ~ 200 ms).
With a movie source, for example, adjust so that the
movement of the actors’ lips is synchronized with the
sound.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Video Setup” menu reappears.
When the HDMI connectors are connected, the black may
seem to stand out, depending on the TV or the monitor. In
this case, set this to “Enhanced”.
When “Y Cb Cr” is selected under “Color Space”, “RGB
Mode Setup” will have no effect.
69
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
5
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Advanced Playback” menu reappears.
3
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
“Custom”.
Makes more detailed audio playback settings.
Advanced Playback
Setting the 2ch Direct/Stereo
Set this when you want to change the speaker settings when the
surround mode is set to the 2-channel Direct or Stereo mode.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Advanced Playback” at the “System Setup
Menu”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Advanced Playback” menu screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“2ch Direct / Stereo”, then press the ENTER
button.
• The “2ch Direct / Stereo” screen appears.
Example: This screen is displayed in function of the
settings made at “Speaker Configuration”,
“Subwoofer Setup”, “Distance” and
“Crossover Frequency”
4
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
setting, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to
select the parameter.
2 Setting the front B speakers when the
surround mode is set to the 2-channel Direct
or Stereo
• When “Front B” is selected at “Power Amp Assign” and
“Custom” is selected at this setting, the “Front B” setting
is displayed.
To play signals from the Front B speaker when in the 2-
channel Direct or Stereo mode, set “Used”.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Video Setup” menu reappears.
4
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Exit”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “System Setup Menu” reappears.
70
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
Setting the Dolby Digital Setup
Sets the down-mixing method when not using a center speaker
or surround speakers.
Setting the Auto Surround Mode
The surround mode used at last for the four types of input signals
shown below is stored in the memory, and the signal is
automatically played with that surround mode the next time it is
input.
Note that the surround mode setting is also stored separately for
the different input sources.
q Analog and PCM 2-channel signals (STEREO)
w 2-channel signals of Dolby Digital, DTS or other multi-
channel format (DOLBY PLIIx cinema)
e Multi-channel signals of Dolby Digital, DTS or other multi-
channel format (DOLBY/DTS SURROUND)
r PCM and DSD multi-channel signals other than Dolby
Digital and DTS (MULTI CH IN)
Default settings are indicated in ( ).
During playback in the PURE DIRECT mode, the surround
mode does not change even if the input signal is changed.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Dolby Digital Setup” at the “Advanced
Playback” menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Dolby Digital Setup” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
“ON” if you want to use the Compression,
“OFF” if you do not want to use it.
ON:
The dynamic range is compressed automatically
according to the combination of speakers being used.
OFF:
The dynamic range is not compressed.
Set “Compression” to “ON” if it seems that sound is
distorted because the input level exceeds the allowable
input for the front speakers.
When a center speaker or surround speakers are not
connected, the sounds in those channels are directed to
the front speakers.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Advanced Playback” menu reappears.
Setting the Manual EQ Setup
Allows you to adjust the tonal quality of the various speakers
(except the subwoofer) while listening to a music source.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Manual EQ Setup” at the “Advanced
Playback” menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Manual EQ” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
adjustment mode, then press the ENTER button.
All CH:
All channels can be adjusted simultaneously.
L/R CH:
The left and right channels of the pair of speakers can be
adjusted simultaneously.
Each CH:
The channels can be adjusted separately.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Auto Surround Mode” at the “Advanced
Playback” menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Auto Surround Mode” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
“ON” if you want to use the auto surround
mode, “OFF” if you do not want to use it.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Advanced Playback” menu reappears.
• The various settings applied in the auto surround mode can be
checked via the on screen display. Simply press the ON SCREEN
button.
71
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
3
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
speaker to be set.
• The screen switches to the character input screen.
Example: When “L/R CH” is selected.
5
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Manual EQ” screen reappears.
6
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Exit”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Advanced Playback” menu reappears.
The display changes as follows.
When the surround back speaker setting is set to
“1spkr” at “Speaker Configuration”, this is set to
“SB”.
e Select the “All CH”
In this case, speaker selection is not performed.
If a value is already set for the FL channel, the data
stored for the FL channel is displayed.
q Select the “L/R CH”
w Select the “Each CH”
FL/FR
SBL/SBR
C SLA/SRA
SLB/SRBSL/SR A+B
FL
SBR
1spkr
FR
C
SLA
SRA SLB
SRBSBL SR A+B SL A+B
SB
4
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
frequency, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to adjust the gain level.
Each frequency can be adjusted the range from –20 dB to
+6 dB in 0.5 dB step.
7
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Exit”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “System Setup Menu” reappears.
•“Base Curve Copy” is displayed after performing the Auto
Setup.
• To restore the settings to their defaults, select “Default Yes
0”, then press the CURSOR
FF
button.
• If the “Auto Setup” procedure has not been performed, this
item is not displayed.
Procedure for copying the “Flat” correction
curve
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
button to select the “Base
Curve Copy”, then press the CURSOR
FF
button.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
button to select the “Yes”.
The type of the copied correction curve is displayed in the
upper right of this screen.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Manual EQ” screen reappears.
72
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment
If no Surround back speakers are used in the main room, their
amplifier channels can be assigned for multi–zone use or the
front speaker‘s bi-amp connection.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Power Amp Assign” at the “Option Setup”
menu, then press the ENTER button.
•The “Power Amp Assign” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select which
channel to assign the surround back power
amplifier to.
S. Back:
The Surround back speakers are used in MAIN ZONE.
Front:
This provides a bi-amp mode for the two main front
speakers, replicating the front left and front right
amplifier channel’s outputs.
Front B:
Both surround back power amplifier channels can be
used to provide a second set of stereo outputs that
match the front left and right speakers, providing a
Speaker B option for stereo sound in another location
( page 69).
ZONE2:
This mode assigns the surround back amplifier channels
to provide ZONE2 speaker-level outputs from the
surround back speaker terminals.
ZONE3:
This mode assigns the surround back amplifier channels
to provide ZONE3 speaker-level outputs from the
surround back speaker terminals.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Option Setup” menu reappears.
Setting the Volume Control
Set the upper limit for the volume, the volume level when the
power is turned on, and the volume level when the mute mode
is set for the different zones.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Volume Control” at the “Option Setup” menu,
then press the ENTER button.
• The “Volume Control” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
desired setting, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the parameter.
Volume Limit:
Set the upper limit for the volume for the different zones.
• –20 dB, –10 dB, 0 dB:
The volume cannot be increased above the selected
levels.
• OFF:
If you do not want to set a volume limit, select “OFF”.
In this case, the volume can be set to the AVR-3806’s
maximum volume (output) level of +18 dB, which is
extremely loud.
Power On Level:
Set the volume that is set when the power is turned on
for the different zones.
You can adjust the MAIN ZONE volume level within the
range of –80 to +18 dB in steps of 1.0 dB and the ZONE2
(or ZONE3) volume level within the range of –70 dB to
+18 dB in steps of 1.0 dB.
• – – – (Mute)
The volume is always muted when the power is turned
on.
• LAST
The volume set when the AVR-3806 was last used is
stored in the memory and set when the power is turned
on.
Front Bi-Amp connections
Certain loudspeakers are equipped with two sets of input
terminals, for bi-amplification. The AVR-3806 Amp Assign
mode allows you to power bi-amp-capable speakers with
two amplifier channels. Be sure to consult the owner’s
manual of your bi-amp-capable speakers for further
information before proceeding.
AVR-3806
SPEAKER
NOTE:
• When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove
the short-circuiting bar included with the speaker.
Option Setup
73
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
Mute Level:
Set the volume attenuation level when the mute mode is
set for the different zones.
• FULL
The volume is fully muted.
• –40 dB
The volume is lowered 40 dB from the current level.
• –20 dB
The volume is lowered 20 dB from the current level.
Volume Level:
Set whether to fix the output level for the different zones
or make it variable.
• Variable
The level can be adjusted freely using buttons on the
remote control unit.
• –40 dB, 0 dB
The output level is fixed at the set level and the volume
can no longer be adjusted.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Option Setup” menu reappears.
• The volume control for ZONE3 can be set only when “ZONE3”
is selected at “Power Amp Assign” ( page 72).
• For ZONE2 and ZONE3, the “Volume Limit” and “Power On
Level” can be set when “Variable” is selected for “Volume
Level”.
• When the power amplifier is assigned to either of the ZONE2
and ZONE3 channels at “Power Amp Assign”, “–VAR–” (only
variable) is displayed and the fixed level cannot be set.
Setting the Trigger Out
• Two 12 V DC Trigger Outputs on the rear panel can be used to
control other devices with compatible trigger inputs, such as
motorized screens, motorized screen masking, motorized
drapes, and other trigger-controlled devices.
• Set the DC output supplied from the trigger out terminals for
the various input sources to “ON” or “OFF”.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Trigger Out” at the “Option Setup” menu, then
press the ENTER button.
• The “Trigger Out” screen appears.
3
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3).
The power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns on
and off when the power for the set zone is turned on and
off.
6
Press the ENTER button.
• The “Trigger Out” screen reappears.
Use the same procedure to make the settings for Trigger
Out 2.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
trigger out terminal you want to set, then press
the ENTER button.
• The setting screen appears.
Example: When “Trigger Out 1” is selected
5
If “MAIN” was selected at step 3:
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
surround mode, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the “ON” or “OFF”.
4
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
input source, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the “ON” or “OFF”.
ON:
When that input source is selected, the power supplied
from the trigger out terminal turns on.
OFF:
When that input source is selected, the power supplied
from the trigger out terminal turns off.
ON:
If “ON” is selected when an input source set to “ON” is
selected, the power supplied from the trigger out
terminal turns on.
OFF:
If “OFF” is selected when an input source set to “ON”
is selected, the power supplied from the trigger out
terminal turns off.
74
Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1
Setup Lock
The system setup settings can be locked so that they cannot be
changed easily.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Setup Lock” at the “Option Setup” menu, then
press the ENTER button.
• The “Setup Lock” screen appears.
3
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Exit”, then press the ENTER button.
• Finalize the setting and exit the “Option Setup” menu.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
button to select “ON”, to
lock the system setup settings, then press the
ENTER button.
• The “Option Setup” menu reappears.
• When the setup lock function is activated, the settings listed
below cannot be changed, and “Setup Locked” is displayed
when related buttons are operated.
• System setup settings
• Surround parameter settings
• Tone control settings
• Channel level settings (including test tones)
• RoomEQ
• To unlock, press the SETUP button again and display the “Setup
Lock” screen, then select “OFF” and press the ENTER button.
If “Yes ” is selected for “Default”, the setting are
automatically reset to the default values.
7
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Exit”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Option Setup” menu reappears.
75
Advanced Setup – Part 2
Advanced Setup – Part 2
This Speaker Setup section describes the procedures to make speaker settings manually (without using the Auto Setup function),
as well as to make manual changes to settings that have already been made by the Auto Setup function.
• If the “Auto Setup” procedure has already been performed, there is no need to make this setting.
• Perform this setting if you wish to make the settings for your speaker systems manually.
Speaker Setup
4
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Speaker Setup” menu reappears.
ENTER
CURSORSYSTEM SETUP
Setting the type of speakers
The composition of the signals output to each channels and the
frequency response are adjusted according to the combination of
speakers actually being used.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Speaker Setup” at the “System Setup Menu”,
then press the ENTER button.
• The “Speaker Setup” menu screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Speaker Config.”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Speaker Config.” screen appears.
Center Sp.
Front Sp.
Subwoofer
Surround Sp. A
Surround back Sp.
Surround Sp. B
3
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
speaker, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button
to select the parameter.
• Select “Large” or “Small” not according to the actual size of
the speaker but according to the speaker’s capacity for playing
low frequency (bass sound below the frequency set for the
Crossover Frequency) signals. If you do not know, try
comparing the sound at both settings (setting the volume to a
level low enough so as not to damage the speakers) to
determine the proper setting.
2 Parameters
Large:
Select this when using speakers that can fully reproduce deep
bass well below the frequency set for the Crossover Frequency
mode.
Small:
Select this when using speakers that are not capable of
handling deep bass well below the frequency set for the
Crossover Frequency mode.Deep bass content in any channel
with a SMALL speaker is routed to the subwoofer(s).
Yes / No:
Select “Yes ” when a subwoofer is installed, “No” when a
subwoofer is not installed.
None:
Select this when no speakers are installed.
2spkrs / 1spkr:
Select the number of speakers to be used for the surround back
channel.
ENTER
CURSOR
SYSTEM
SETUP
76
Advanced Setup – Part 2 Advanced Setup – Part 2
Setting the low frequency distribution
• Set the subwoofer mode according to the speaker system
being used.
• Select the play mode that provides bass reproduction with
body.
Setting the Distance
• Input the distance between the listening position and the
different speakers to set the delay time for the surround mode.
Preparations:
Measure the distances between the listening position and the
speakers (L1 to L10 on the diagram at the below).
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Subwoofer Setup” at the “Speaker Setup”
menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Subwoofer Setup” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
setting.
LFE:
For any channel(s) that are set to LARGE, low
frequencies in that channel’s corresponding source are
directed to that loudspeaker only. Low frequencies that
are directed to the subwoofer(s) are from the program
source LFE channel, and from other channels where the
speakers are set to SMALL.
LFE+Main:
Low frequencies from speaker channels that have been
set to LARGE are reproduced from those speakers as
well as from the subwoofer(s). Depending upon the
characteristics of the LARGE main speakers, this mode
may provide a more even low frequency response
throughout the listening room.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Distance” at the “Speaker Setup” menu, then
press the ENTER button.
• The “Distance” screen appears.
3
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
speaker to be set.
2 Assignment of low frequency signal range
•The only signals produced from the subwoofer channel are
LFE signals (during playback of Dolby Digital or DTS signals)
and the low frequency signal range of channels set to “Small”
in the setup menu. The low frequency signal range of
channels set to “Large” are produced from those channels.
2 Subwoofer Setup
•The subwoofer mode setting is only valid when and “Yes ” is
set for the subwoofer in the “Speaker Configuration” settings
( page 75).
•When the input signal is analog or a PCM signal not including
LFE signals, if “LFE” is selected, the low frequency
component is not output from the subwoofer. To output the
subwoofer channel, select “LFE+Main”.
L1 L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7 L8
L9 L10
C FRFL
SW
Listening position
SLA SRA
SLB SRB
SBL SBR
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
desired unit, “Meters” or “Feet”.
• The “Distance” screen appears automatically.
Example: When “Feet” is selected
.... L1
.... L2
.... L3
.... L4
.... L5
.... L6
.... L7
.... L8
.... L9
.... L10
A subwoofer with sufficient low frequency playback capability
can better handle deep bass than most main and surround
speakers, and the system’s overall performance will be
greatly enhanced when SMALL is set for the main (front) and
surround speakers.
When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically
set to “Yes ”, and when “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front”
is automatically set to “Large”.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Speaker Setup” menu reappears.
77
Advanced Setup – Part 2 Advanced Setup – Part 2
4
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to set the
distance between the center speaker and
listening position.
Example: When the distance is set to 10 feet for the
center speaker
The distance changes in units of 0.1 foot (0.03 meters) or
1 foot (0.3 meters) each time the button is pressed. Select
the value closest to the measured distance.
If “Yes ” is selected for “Default”, the settings are
automatically reset to the default values.
When “Step” is selected, you can select the unit of “1 ft
(0.1 m)” or “0.1 ft (0.01 m)”.
Please note that the difference of distance for every
speaker should be 20 ft (6.0 m) or less. If you set an
invalid distance, a CAUTION notice, such as screen
right will appear. In this case, please relocate the
blinking speaker(s) so that its distance is no larger
than the value shown in highlighted line.
The “Surr. Sp.” can only be selected when both surround
speakers A and B have been selected at the System Setup
Menu (when both A and B have been set to “Large” or
“Small”).
When the surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr”
for “Speaker Configuration”, this is set to “SB”.
5
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Speaker Setup” menu reappears.
The AVR-3806 automatically sets the optimum surround
delay time for the listening room.
• Use this setting to adjust so that the playback level between
the different channels is equal.
• From the listening position, listen to the test tones produced
from the speakers to adjust the level.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Channel Level” at the “Speaker Setup” menu,
then press the ENTER button.
• The “Channel Level” screen appears.
4
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Test Tone Start”, then press the CURSOR
FF
button to select the “Yes”.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
“Auto” or “Manual”.
5
-1
When “Auto” mode is selected:
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to adjust all
the speakers to the same volume.
• The test tones are emitted from each speaker in the
following order, at 4-second intervals during the first and
second time, and at the 2-second intervals during the
third and subsequent cycles:
Auto:
Adjust the level while listening to the test tones
produced automatically from each speaker.
Test tones are automatically emitted from each speaker.
Manual:
Select the speaker from which you want to produce the
test tone to adjust the level.
Surr. Sp. : A
Adjusts the balance of the playback level between the
channels when using surround speaker A.
Surr. Sp. : A + B
Adjusts the balance of the playback level between the
channels when using surround speakers A and B at the
same time.
Surr. Sp. : B
Adjusts the balance of the playback level between the
channels when using surround speaker B.
3
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Surr. Sp.”, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the surround speaker(s) from
which you want to produce the test tone (A, B or
A+B).
Example: When the “Auto” mode is selected
FL
SW
1spkr
2spkrs
C
FR
SR
SBL
SL
SB
SBR
Setting the Channel Level
78
Advanced Setup – Part 2 Advanced Setup – Part 2
Example: When the volume is set to –11.5 dB while the
test tone is being produced from the Front Lch
speaker
The volume can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB
in units of 0.5 dB.
5
-2
When “Manual” mode is selected:
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
speaker, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button
to adjust all the speakers to the same volume.
Example: “Manual” mode is selected.
6
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Channel Level” screen reappears.
• To cancel the settings, press the CURSOR
HH
button to select the
“Level Clear” and “Yes ” on the “Channel Level” screen, then
make the settings again.
• When adjusting the level of an active subwoofer system, you
may also need to adjust the subwoofer’s own volume control.
• When you adjust the channel levels while in the system setup
channel level mode, the channel level adjustments mode will
affect all surround modes. Consider this mode a master
channel level adjustment mode.
• After you have completed the system setup channel level
adjustments, you can then activate the individual surround
modes and adjust channel levels that will be remembered for
each of those modes. Then, whenever you activate a particular
surround sound mode, your preferred channel level
adjustments for just that mode will be recalled. Check the
instructions for adjusting channel levels within each surround
mode ( page 42).
• You can adjust the channel levels for each of the following
surround modes: PURE DIRECT/DIRECT, STEREO,
DOLBY/DTS SURROUND, 7CH STEREO, WIDE SCREEN,
SUPER STADIUM, ROCK ARENA, JAZZ CLUB, CLASSIC
CONCERT, MONO MOVIE, VIDEO GAME, MATRIX and
VIRTUAL.
• When using either surround speakers A or B, or when using
surround speakers A and B at the same time, be sure to adjust
the balance of playback levels between each channel for the
various selections of “A”, “B” and “A + B”.
2 Adjusting the test tone using the remote
control unit
• As described below, this adjustment can be accomplished via
the with remote control unit.
• Adjusting with the remote control unit using the test tones is
only possible in the “Auto” mode and only effective in the
STANDARD (DOLBY/DTS SURROUND) mode. The adjusted
levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the
memory.
1
Press the TEST TONE button.
• Test tones are output from the different speakers.
3
After completing the adjustment, press the TEST
TONE
button again.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to adjust the
channel level so that the volume of the test tones
is the same for all the speakers.
Setting the Crossover Frequency
• Set the crossover frequency according to the low frequency
response characteristics of the various (front, center, surround
and surround back) speaker systems.
• If a connected main or surround loudspeaker has a specified –3
dB low frequency response rolloff, adjust the crossover
frequency for that speaker to match the specified low
frequency response limit – e.g. 80 Hz.
• When a speaker is set to SMALL, low frequencies in that
channel that are below the crossover frequency are directed to
the system’s subwoofer(s), or to speakers that are set to
LARGE, for systems with no connected subwoofer(s).
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Crossover Frequency” at the “Speaker Setup”
menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Crossover Frequency” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
frequency.
40, 60, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 150, 200, 250 Hz:
Set as desired according to your speakers’ bass playback
ability.
Advanced:
The crossover frequency can be set individually for the
different speakers ( page 79).
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Speaker Setup” menu reappears.
79
Advanced Setup – Part 2 Advanced Setup – Part 2
• If “LFE+Main” is set at “Subwoofer Setup”, “SW:LFE+Main”
( page 76) is displayed at the top right of the screen.
• We recommend using with the crossover frequency set to
“80Hz”, but depending on the speaker, setting it to a different
frequency may improve frequency response near the crossover
frequency.
• The crossover frequency mode is valid only when subwoofer is
set to ON, and when one or more speakers are set to SMALL,
as described in section “Speaker Configuration” settings (
page 75).
• If “LFE” is selected at “Subwoofer Setup”, the frequencies
can only be selected for speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker
Configuration”.
• If “LFE+Main” is set at “Subwoofer Setup”, the frequencies
can be selected regardless of the speaker size setting.
• For the “WIDE SCREEN” and “7CH STEREO” DSP simulation
modes, the surround speakers can be set separately.
Setting the crossover frequency individually
for the different channels
1
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
“Advanced” at the “Crossover Frequency”
screen.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
speaker to be set.
3
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
frequency.
Selecting the Surround Speakers for the
different surround modes
• This menu is displayed when both surround speakers A and B
are used.
• At this screen preset the surround speakers to be used in each
surround modes.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Surround Sp Setup” at the “Speaker Setup”
menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Surround Sp Setup” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
surround mode, then press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the surround speaker.
A:
When surround speakers A is used.
B:
When surround speakers B is used.
A + B:
When both surround speakers A and B are used.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Speaker Setup” menu reappears.
4
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Speaker Setup” menu reappears.
4
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Exit”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “System Setup Menu” reappears.
2 About Speaker type setting when using both
surround speakers A and B
• If “Small” is set for either surround speakers A or B, the output
is the same as when “Small” is set for both A and B.
80
Advanced Setup – Part 2 Advanced Setup – Part 2
Others Setup
Setting the Room EQ Setup
Select the setting of an Equalizer that has been set with Auto
Setup or Manual EQ.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Room EQ Setup” at the “Auto Setup / Room
EQ” menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Room EQ Setup” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
“All” or “Assign”.
All:
Sets the Equalizer for all surround modes.
Assign:
Sets the Equalizer individually for each surround mode.
Setting the Direct Mode Setup
Perform the ON/OFF setting of Room EQ when the surround
mode is “DIRECT” or “PURE DIRECT”.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Room EQ Setup” at the “Auto Setup / Room
EQ” menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Direct mode Setup” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
“ON” or “OFF”.
3
-1
When “All” is selected:
qq
Press the ENTER button.
• The “Room EQ” screen appears.
3
-2
ww
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
equalizer setting.
OFF:
The Equalizer is not used.
Audyssey:
Adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct
the effects of room acoustics.
Front:
Adjusts the frequency response of the surround
speakers to match the characteristics of the front
channel speakers.
Flat:
Adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to the
flattest response. This mode is suitable for multi-channel
music surround sound sources.
Manual:
Selects the setting value that was set in the Manual EQ
Setup.
For details of the “Manual EQ Setup” ( page 70, 71).
When “Assign” is selected:
After completing system setup, select the desired
equalizer setting pressing the ROOM EQ button.
• Equalizer settings for the individual surround modes can
be stored in the memory.
Whenever the ROOM EQ button is pressed, the display
switches as shown below.
OFF Audyssey
FlatManual
Front
4
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Auto Setup / Room EQ” menu reappears.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Auto Setup / Room EQ” menu reappears.
• The Equalizer setting of “Audyssey”, “Front” and “Flat” can be
selected after performing the Auto Setup.
• When the speaker set as “None” with the Auto Setup is
changed to on manually, the equalizer of “Audyssey”, “Front”
and “Flat” cannot be used.
• The Equalizer setting can be selected directly by ROOM EQ
button.
• When headphones are connected, the Room EQ cannot be
used.
Setting the MIC Input Select
Sets whether the setup microphone is connected to the PIN
JACK (V.AUX L channel) connector or the MINI JACK (SETUP
MIC) connector.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Mic Input Select” at the “Auto Setup / Room
EQ” menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Mic Input Select” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
“Mic” or “V.AUX L”.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
• The “Auto Setup / Room EQ” menu reappears.
81
Advanced Setup – Part 2 Advanced Setup – Part 2
Check the parameter
• The results of the measured items can be checked.
• The EQ parameters that were set in Auto Setup can be
checked.
• This item is displayed, after the measurement result of the
“Auto Setup / Room EQ” is decided.
1
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Parameter Check” at the “Auto Setup / Room
EQ” menu, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Parameter Check” screen appears.
4
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
Equalizer curve, then press the ENTER button.
• The “EQ Check” screen appears.
2
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
items, then press the ENTER button.
• The verification screen appears.
For instructions on checking the results of each item (
page 12, 13).
3
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“EQ Parameter Check”, then press the ENTER
button.
• The “EQ Parameter Check” screen appears.
The display is only an approximate picture of the response
and that correction is happening at all frequencies.
5
Press the CURSOR
FF
or
GG
button to select the
speaker channel.
6
If the check ends, pressing the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the “Exit”, then press the ENTER
button.
• The “EQ Parameter Check” screen reappears.
7
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Exit”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Parameter Check” screen reappears.
8
The results of the “Auto Setup” procedure can
be reset even if the settings have been changed
after performing the “Auto Setup” procedure:
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Restore Yes
00
”, then press the CURSOR
FF
button.
9
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Exit”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “Auto Setup / Room EQ” menu reappears.
10
Press the CURSOR
DD
or
HH
button to select the
“Exit”, then press the ENTER button.
• The “System Setup Menu” reappears.
82
Advanced Setup – Part 2 Advanced Setup – Part 2
PageDefault settingsAuto Setup / Room EQ
1. Auto Setup/Room EQ
1 Auto Setup
Room EQ
Setup
2
Direct Mode
Setup
4
Set the ON/OFF setting of Room EQ, in the case of the
surround mode is in “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
3
Mic Input
Select
Set this to switch the Mic Input jack for use for Mic or
V.AUX L-channel input terminal.
This unit performs an analysis of the speaker system and
measures the acoustic characteristics of your room to
permit an appropriate automatic setting.
Set the Room EQ setting with All or Assign for each
surround mode.
–
All, Room EQ = OFF
OFF
Mic
9~13
80
80
80
System setup items and default values (set upon shipment from the factory)
PageDefault settingsSpeaker Setup
2. Speaker Setup
1
3
Speaker
Configuration
Channel
Level
Input the combination of speakers in your system and their
corresponding sizes (SMALL for regular speakers, LARGE
for full-size, full-range) to automatically set the composition
of the signals output from the speakers and the frequency
response.
This adjusts the volume of the signals output from the
speakers and subwoofer for the different channels in order
to obtain optimum effects.
Front Sp.
Large
Center Sp.
Surround Sp.
A / B
Subwoofer
Small SmallYes
Front
L & R
Center
Surround
L & R (A)
Subwoofer
12 ft (3.6 m) 12 ft (3.6 m) 10 ft (3.0 m)12 ft (3.6 m)
Front
L
Front
R
Center Surround R Subwoofer
0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
0 dB
Surround Back
Sp.
Small / 2spkrs
4
Distance
This parameter is for optimizing the timing with which the
audio signals are produced from the speakers and
subwoofer according to the listening position.
Surround
L & R (B)
10 ft (3.0 m)
Surround L
0 dB
Crossover
Frequency
Set the frequency (Hz) below which the bass sound of the
various speakers is to be output from the subwoofer.
5
80Hz
75
2
Subwoofer
Setup
This selects the subwoofer for playing deep bass signals.
LFE
76
76, 77
77, 78
78, 79
Surround
Speaker
Setup
Use this function when using multiple surround
speaker combinations for more ideal surround
sound. Once the combinations of surround
speakers to be used for the different surround
modes are preset, the surround speakers are
selected automatically according to the
surround mode.
Surround
mode
Surround
speaker
DOLBY/
DTS CINEMA
DOLBY/
DTS MUSIC
WIDE
SCREEN
7 CH
STEREO
DSP
SIMULATION
MULTI CH
MODE
AA AAAAA
6
DOLBY GAME
79
Surround
Back
10 ft (3.0 m)
Surround
Back R
0 dB
Surround
Back L
0 dB
83
Advanced Setup – Part 2 Advanced Setup – Part 2
PageDefault settingsVideo Setup
4. Video Setup
2
Component
In Assign
HDMI In
Assign
This assigns the component video input terminals for the
different input sources.
The HDMI input terminals are assigned for the different
input sources.
Select the HDMI audio signal playback method.
DVD VDP TV
1
67
3
Video Convert
This sets whether or not to use the video conversion
function.
ON
67
66, 67
DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 V.AUX
1-RCA NONE 2-RCA 3-RCA NONE NONE NONE
Audio Delay
Set the audio delay timing to synchronize the sound and
video.
5
0 ms
68
On Screen
Display
This sets whether or not to display the on-screen display
that appears on the monitor screen when the controls on
the remote control unit or main unit are operated.
6
Function/Mode = ON, Master Volume = ON, Mode = Mode 1
68, 69
DVD VDP TV DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 V.AUX
NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE
4
HDMI Out
Setup
This sets whether or not to use the function for converting
analog video (composite video, S-Video or component
video) signals into HDMI signals.
When using this conversion function, set the color format
and video range of the signals output from the HDMI
terminal.
Convert = ON, Color Space = Y Cb Cr, RGB Mode = Normal
67, 68
PageDefault settingsAudio Input Setup
3. Audio Input Setup
63
Digital In
Assign
This assigns the digital input terminals for the
different input sources.
Input
source
Digital
Inputs
CD DVD VDP TV DBS VCR-1 VCR-2
COAX 1 COAX 2 OPT 1 OFF OPT 2 OPT 3 OFF
1
CDR /
TAPE
OPT 4
V.AUX
OPT 5
2 EXT.IN Setup Set the Ext.In terminals playback method.
Surr.Sp = Surr.A, SW Level = +15dB
64
Input
Function Lev.
The playback level is corrected individually for the different
input sources.
TUNER PHONO CD
CDR /
TAPE
DVD VDP TV
0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
3
VCR-2
0 dB
DBS VCR-1
0 dB 0 dB
V.AUX
0 dB
4
Function
Rename
The names of the different input source can be changed as
desired and displayed on the display.
64
5
Tuner
Presets
FM stations are received automatically and
stored in the memory.
A1 ~ A8
B1 ~ B8
C1 ~ C8
D1 ~ D8
E1 ~ E8
87.5/89.1/98.1/107.9/90.1/90.1/90.1/90.1 MHz
520/600/1000/1400/1500/1710 kHz, 90.1/90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
Auto
Preset
Memory
F1 ~ F8
G1 ~ G8
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
Preset channels that are not used often can be
skipped.
Preset
Skip
The preset channels can be given the names
you want.
Preset
Name
65
All preset channels = ON
65
–
65, 66
63, 64
TUNER PHONO CD
CDR /
TAPE
DVD VDP TV VCR-2DBS VCR-1 V.AUX
Option Setup
84
Advanced Setup – Part 2 Advanced Setup – Part 2
PageDefault settingsAdvanced Playback
5. Advanced Playback
1
2
2ch
Direct/Stereo
Auto
Surround
Mode
Turn the audio compression on or off when down-mixing
Dolby Digital signals.
3
Dolby Digital
Setup
The speaker settings can be changed specifically for
playing in the 2-channel direct or stereo mode.
Set the Auto surround mode function.
Basic
OFF
Auto Surround Mode = ON
69
70
70
4
This parameter is for optimizing the Room EQ with which
the audio signals are produced from the speakers.
Manual EQ
Setup
All Channels and Frequency = 0 dB
70, 71
PageDefault settings
6. Option Setup
1
Power Amp
Assign
To suit your preference, a surround back channel’s power
amplifier can be assigned to the front channel for bi-amp
playback, ZONE2 or ZONE3.
72
S. Back
74
2
Trigger Out
Setup
This sets the Trigger Out output for the
different input sources.
If “ZONE = MAIN” is selected, settings can be
made for the individual surround modes.
3
Volume
Control
73, 74
Setup Lock
This sets the volume level of each zone output.
Volume Limit:
This sets the upper limit for the master
volume.
Power On Level:
This sets the volume level upon switching on
the power of each zone.
Mute Level:
This sets the amount of attenuation of the
audio output when each zone is muted.
Volume Level:
This sets whether the output level of ZONE2
is fixed or variable.
72, 73
Vol.Limit = OFF, P. On Lev. = LAST, Mute Lev. = FULL
Vol.Lev. = VAR, Vol.Limit = OFF, P. On Lev. = LAST, Mute Lev. = FULL
Trigger
Out 1
ZONE = MAIN, All Surround Modes = ON
This sets whether or not to lock the system
setup settings so that they cannot be changed.
Setup Lock = OFF
Main
Zone2
4
TUNER PHONO CD
CDR /
TAPE
DVD VDP TV
VCR-2DBS VCR-1 V.AUX
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ONON ON ON
Trigger
Out 2
ZONE = 2
TUNER PHONO CD
CDR /
TAPE
DVD VDP TV VCR-2DBS VCR-1 V.AUX
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ONON ON ON
Troubleshooting
85
PageMeasuresCauseSymptom
Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following.
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Have you operated the receiver according to the Operating Instructions?
3. Are the speakers and other components operating properly?
If this unit is not operating properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem
persist, there may be a malfunction. Disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of
purchase.
Display not lit and
sound not produced
when POWER switch
set to on.
• Power supply cord not plugged in
securely.
• Check the insertion of the power
supply cord plug.
25
Display lit but sound
not produced.
• Speaker cables not securely
connected.
• FUNCTION knob position is not
appropriate.
• Volume control set to minimum.
• MUTING is on.
• No digital signal is being input.
• Connect securely.
• Switch to the proper position.
• Turn volume up to suitable level.
• Switch off MUTING.
• Properly select a digital signal
input source.
7
27
27
28
63
Nothing is displayed on
monitor.
• AVR-3806’s video output terminals
and monitor’s input terminals are
not properly connected.
• Monitor TV’s input setting is
wrong.
• The PURE DIRECT mode is set.
• Check that the connections are
correct.
• Set the TV’s input selector to the
terminals to which video signals
are connected.
• Set a surround mode other than
the PURE DIRECT mode.
8, 14 ~
25
–
32
No DTS sound is
produced.
• DVD player’s audio output setting
is not set to bit stream.
• DVD player is not DTS-compatible.
• AVR-3806’s input setting is set to
analog
• Make the DVD player’s initial
settings.
• Use a DTS-compatible player.
• Set to AUTO or DTS.
–
–
29
Copying from DVD to
VCR is not possible.
• Copying between a source such as
DVD and a VCR is not usually
possible, as DVDs are often
encoded with copy-protection
signals that prevent VCR recording.
• Copying is not possible. –
No sound is produced
from subwoofer.
• Subwoofer’s power is not on.
• Subwoofer’s initial setting is set to
“NO”.
• Subwoofer’s output is not
connected.
• The subwoofer’s channel volume
level is set to “OFF”.
• Turn on the power.
• Set the setting to “YES”.
• Connect properly.
• Turn the subwoofer’s channel
volume level up.
—
75
7, 25
42
This unit does not
operate properly when
remote control unit is
used.
• Batteries dead.
• Remote control unit too far from
this unit.
• Obstacle between this unit and
remote control unit.
• Different button is being pressed.
•
< and > ends of batteries inserted
in reverse.
• Replace with new batteries.
• Move closer.
• Remove obstacle.
• Press the proper button.
• Insert batteries properly.
3
3
3
—
3
Power has turned off
and the power
indicator is flashing
red.
• The set’s internal temperature has
risen and the protection circuit has
been activated.
• The core wires of the speaker
cables are touching each other or
the AVR-3806’s rear panel,
activating the protection circuit.
• AVR-3806 is malfunctioning.
• Put the AVR-3806 in a well-
ventilated place.
• Turn off the power, then wait for
the set to fully cool off before
turning the power back on.
• Check the connections of all the
speaker cables.
• Turn off the power and contact a
DENON customer service center.
7
Sound is only produced
from the center
speaker.
• You are playing a monaural source
(TV, AM radio broadcast, etc.) in
the DOLBY/DTS SURROUND
mode.
• When playing monaural sources,
select a surround mode other than
DOLBY/DTS SURROUND mode.
39, 40
An image is not
projected with an
HDMI connection.
• AVR-3806’s HDMI output
terminals and monitor’s input
terminals are not properly
connected.
• No HDMI signal is being input.
• The connected monitor equipment
or other equipments do not
support HDCP.
• The output format of the
connected player (HDMI FORMAT)
does not matche the supported
input format of connected monitor
equipments.
• Check the HDMI connection.
• Properly select HDMI signal input
source.
• The AVR-3806 will not output
video signal unless the other
equipment supports HDCP.
• Check whether the output format
of the connected player (HDMI
FORMAT) matches the supported
input format of connected monitor
equipments.
16
66, 67
16
16
The HDMI audio is not
output.
• The AVR-3806 does not play HDMI
audio signals.
• The HDMI audio signals are not
output from the connected
monitor device.
• Set the HDMI audio playback
setting at the “HDMI In Assign”
settings to “AMP”.
• Set the HDMI audio playback
setting at the “HDMI In Assign”
settings to “TV”.
66, 67
66, 67
No test tones are
produced.
• Surround mode is set to a mode
other than Dolby Surround.
• Set to Dolby Surround. —
No sound is produced
from surround
speakers.
• Surround mode is set to
“STEREO”.
• Set to a mode other than
“STEREO”.
—
Symptom Cause Measures Page
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
86
PageMeasuresCauseSymptom
23
45
46
45
“NO SIGNAL” is
displayed in the XM
mode.
• The signal cannot be received.
• Reposition your XM Connect-and-
Play antenna.
“CHECK ANTENNA” is
displayed in the XM
mode.
• AVR-3806’s XM terminal and the
XM Connect-and-Play antenna is
not properly connected.
• Check that the connection are
correct.
“OFF AIR” is displayed
in the XM mode.
• The selected channel is not
currently broadcasting.
• Select the another channel.
Receiving only XM
channels 0 and 1.
• The XM Tuner is not activated. • Contact XM Radio.
Additional Information
87
2 Types of multi-channel signals
Dolby Digital (including Dolby Digital EX), DTS (including DTS-
ES), DVD-Audio, and Super Audio CD.
Note on the above: MUSE 3.1 and MPEG multi-channel audio
are not available to North American consumers – same is true for
Dolby’s AAC.
“Source” here does not refer to the type of signal (format) but
the recorded content. Sources can be divided into two major
categories.
2 Types of sources
• Movie audio:
Signals created to be played in movie theaters. In general
sound is recorded to be played in movie theaters equipped
with multiple surround speakers, regardless of the format
(Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.).
• Other types of audio:
These signals are designed to recreate a 360° sound field
using three to five speakers.
In this case the speakers should surround the listener from
all sides to create a uniform sound field from 360°. Ideally the
surround speakers should function as “point” sound sources
in the same way as the front speakers.
These two types of sources thus have different properties, and
different speaker settings, particularly for the surround speakers,
are required in order to achieve the ideal sound.
In this case it is important to achieve the same sense of
expansion as in a movie theater with the surround channels.
To do so, in some cases the number of surround speakers is
increased (to four or eight) or speakers with bipolar or dipolar
properties are used.
SL : Surround L channel
SR : Surround R channel
SB : Surround B (back) channel
Additional Information
Optimum surround sound for different
sources
There are currently various types of multi-channel signals (signals
or formats with more than two channels).
FL C
SW
FR
FL C
SW
FR
SL SR
SB
SL SR
SB
Multiple surround speakers
Movie theater sound field
Listening room
sound field
FL C
SW
FR
SL SR
The AVR-3806’s surround speaker selection function makes it
possible to change the settings according to the combination
of surround speakers being used and the surrounding
environment in order to achieve the ideal surround sound for
all sources. This means that you can connect a pair of bipolar
or dipolar surround speakers (mounted on either side of the
prime listening position), as well as a separate pair of direct
radiating (monopolar) speakers placed at the rear corners of
the listening room.
Surround back speakers
A 6.1-channel system is a conventional 5.1-channel system to
which the “surround back” (SB) channel has been added. This
makes it easy to achieve sound positioned directly behind the
listener, something that was previously difficult with sources
designed for conventional multi surround speakers. In addition,
the acoustic image extending between the sides and the rear is
narrowed, thus greatly improving the expression of the surround
signals for sounds moving from the sides to the back and from
the front to the point directly behind the listening position.
FL C
SW
FR
SR chSL ch
Change of positioning and acoustic image
with 5.1-channel systems
Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL
FL C
SW
FR
SL ch SR ch
SB ch
Change of positioning and acoustic image
with 6.1-channel systems
Movement of acoustic image from SR to SB to SL
Additional Information Additional Information
88
2 Number of surround back speakers
Though the surround back channel only consists of 1 channel of
playback signals for 6.1-channel sources (DTS-ES, etc.), we
recommend using two speakers. When using speakers with
dipolar characteristics in particular, it is essential to use two
speakers.
Using two speakers results in a smoother blend with the sound
of the surround channels and better sound positioning of the
surround back channel when listening from a position other than
the center.
2 Placement of the surround left and right
channels when using surround back speakers
Using surround back speakers greatly improves the positioning
of the sound at the rear. Because of this, the surround left and
right channels play an important role in achieving a smooth
transition of the acoustic image from the front to the back. As
shown on the diagram above, in a movie theater the surround
signals are also produced from diagonally in front of the
listeners, creating an acoustic image as if the sound were
floating in space.
To achieve these effects, we recommend placing the speakers
for the surround left and right channels slightly more towards
the front than with conventional surround systems. Doing so
sometimes increases the surround effect when playing
conventional 5.1-channel sources in the 6.1 surround or DTS-ES
Matrix 6.1 mode. Check the surround effects of the various
modes before selecting the surround mode.
With this set, speaker(s) for 1 or 2 channels are required to
achieve a 6.1-channel system (DTS-ES, etc.). Adding these
speakers, however, increases the surround effect not only with
sources recorded in 6.1 channels but also with conventional 2- to
5.1-channel sources. The WIDE SCREEN mode is a mode for
achieving surround sound with up to 7.1 channels using surround
back speakers, for sources recorded in conventional Dolby
Surround as well as Dolby Digital 5.1-channel and DTS Surround
5.1-channel sources. Furthermore, all the Denon original
surround modes ( page 39) are compatible with 7.1-channel
playback, so you can enjoy 7.1-channel sound with any signal
source.
Speaker setting examples
Here we describe a number of speaker settings for different
purposes. Use these examples as guides to set up your system
according to the type of speakers used and the main usage
purpose.
[1] DTS-ES compatible system (using surround back
speakers)
q Basic setting for primarily watching movies
This is recommended when mainly playing movies and using
regular single way or 2-way speakers for the surround speakers.
w
Setting for primarily watching movies using
diffusion type speakers for the surround speakers
For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment, diffuse
radiation speakers such as bipolar types, or dipolar types, provide
a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct
radiating speaker (monopolar). Place these speakers at either
side of the prime listening position, mounted above ear level.
Subwoofer
Surround back speakers
Front speakers
60°
60°
Monitor
Center speaker
[ As seen from above ]
Surround
speakers
Surround speaker
Front speaker
60 to 90 cm
[ As seen from the side ]
Surround back
speaker
Point slightly
downwards
• Set the front speakers with their front surfaces as flush with
the TV or monitor screen as possible. Set the center speaker
between the front left and right speakers and no further from
the listening position than the front speakers.
• Consult the owner’s manual for your subwoofer for advice on
placing the subwoofer within the listening room.
• If the surround speakers are direct-radiating (monopolar) then
place them slightly behind and at an angle to the listening
position and parallel to the walls at a position 60 to 90
centimeters (2 to 3 feet) above ear level at the prime listening
position.
• When using two surround back speakers, place them at the
back facing the front at a narrower distance than the front left
and right speakers. When using one surround back speaker,
place it at the rear center facing the front at a slightly higher
position (0 to 20 cm) than the surround speakers.
• We recommend installing the surround back speaker(s) at a
slightly downward facing angle. This effectively prevents the
surround back channel signals from reflecting off the monitor or
screen at the front center, resulting in interference and making
the sense of movement from the front to the back less sharp.
• Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A
terminals on the AVR-3806 and set all settings on the setup
menu to “A”. (This is the factory default setting ( page 79)).
Surround back speakers
[ As seen from above ]
Surround
speaker
Front speaker
60 to 90 cm
[ As seen from the side ]
Surround
back speaker
Point slightly
downwards
Path of the surround sound from the
speakers to the listening position
60°
Surround
speakers
89
Additional Information Additional Information
• Set the front speakers, center speaker and subwoofer in the
same positions as in example (1).
• It is best to place the surround speakers directly at the side or
slightly to the front of the viewing position, and 60 to 90
centimers (2 to 3 feet) above the ears.
• Same as surround back speaker installation method (1).
Using dipolar speakers for the surround back speakers as well
is more effective.
• Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A
terminals on the AVR-3806 and set all settings on the setup
menu to “A”. (This is the factory default setting. ( page 82)).
• The signals from the surround channels reflect off the walls as
shown on the diagram at the left, creating an enveloping and
realistic surround sound presentation.
For multi-channel music sources however, the use of bipolar or
dipolar speakers mounted at the sides of the listening position
may not be satisfactory in order to create a coherent 360
degree surround sound field. Connect another pair of direct
radiating speakers as described in example (3) and place them
at the rear corners of the room facing towards the prime
listening position.
• Set the front speakers slightly wider apart than the setup for
watching movies only and point them toward the listening
position in order assure clear positioning of the sound.
• Set the center speaker in the same positions as in example (1).
• Set surround speakers A for watching movies in the positions
described in example (1) or (2), depending on the types of
speakers used.
• Set surround speakers B for playing multi-channel music at the
same height as the front speakers and slightly at an angle to the
rear of the listening position, and point them toward the
listening position.
• Connect the surround speakers for watching movies to the
surround speaker A terminals on the AVR-3806, the surround
speakers for playing multi-channel music to the surround
speaker B terminals. Set the surround speaker selection on the
setup menu ( page 79).
e When using different surround speakers for movies and
music
To achieve more effective surround sound for both movies and
music, use different sets of surround speakers and different
surround modes for the two types of sources.
Surround back
speakers
[ As seen from above ]
Surround
speakers A
Front speaker
60 to 90 cm
[ As seen from the side ]
Surround back
speaker
Point slightly
downwards
Surround speakers B
Surround
speakers B
120°
120°
45° ~ 60°
Surround
speakers
Surround speakers
[ As seen from above ]
[ As seen from above ]
Front speaker
60 to 90 cm
Surround speaker
60°
[2] When not using surround back speakers
• Set the front speakers with their front surfaces as flush with
the TV or monitor screen as possible. Set the center speaker
between the front left and right speakers and no further from
the listening position than the front speakers.
• Consult the owner’s manual for your subwoofer for advice on
placing the subwoofer within the listening room.
• If the surround speakers are direct-radiating (monopolar) then
place them slightly behind and at an angle to the listening
position and parallel to the walls at a position 60 to 90
centimeters (2 to 3 feet) above ear level at the prime listening
position.
• Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A
terminals on the AVR-3806 and set all settings on the setup
menu to “A”. (This is the factory default setting. ( page 82)).
Subwoofer
Front speakers
Monitor
Subwoofer
Monitor
Center speaker
Front speakers
Center speaker
90
Additional Information Additional Information
The AVR-3806 is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit
that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to
achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.
[1] Dolby Surround
q Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is the multi-channel digital signal format
developed by Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby Digital consists of up to “5.1” channels - front left,
front right, center, surround left, surround right, and an
additional channel exclusively reserved for additional deep
bass sound effects (the Low Frequency Effects – LFE –
channel, also called the “.1” channel, containing bass
frequencies of up to 120 Hz).
Unlike the analog Dolby Pro Logic format, Dolby Digital’s
main channels can all contain full range sound information,
from the lowest bass, up to the highest frequencies – 22
kHz. The signals within each channel are distinct from the
others, allowing pinpoint sound imaging, and Dolby Digital
offers tremendous dynamic range from the most powerful
sound effects to the quietest, softest sounds, free from
noise and distortion.
2 Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic
Comparison of home
surround systems
No. recorded channels
(elements)
No. playback channels
Playback channels
(max.)
Audio processing
High frequency
playback limit of
surround channel
Dolby Digital
5.1 ch
5.1 ch
L, R, C, SL, SR, SW
Digital discrete
processing Dolby
Digital encoding/
decoding
20 kHz
Dolby Pro Logic
2 ch
4 ch
L, R, C, S
(SW - recommended)
Analog matrix
processing Dolby
Surround
7 kHz
Surround
2 Dolby Digital compatible media and playback
methods
Marks indicating Dolby Digital compatibility: .
The following are general examples. Also refer to the
player’s operating instructions.
Media
DVD
1
Others
(satellite broadcasts,
CATV, etc.)
Dolby Digital output
terminals
Optical or coaxial
digital output
(same as for PCM)
1
Optical or coaxial
digital output
(same as for PCM)
Playback method
(reference page)
Set the input mode to
“AUTO”
(
page
29).
Set the input mode to
“AUTO”
(
page
29).
1: Some DVD digital outputs have the function of switching
the Dolby Digital signal output method between “bit
stream” and “(convert to) PCM”. When playing in Dolby
Digital surround on the AVR-3806, switch the DVD
player’s output mode to “bit stream”. In some cases
players are equipped with both “bit stream + PCM” and
“PCM only” digital outputs. In this case connect the “bit
stream + PCM” terminals to the AVR-3806.
w Dolby Pro LogicII
• Dolby Pro LogicII is a new multi-channel playback format
developed by Dolby Laboratories using feedback logic
steering technology and offering improvements over
conventional Dolby Pro Logic circuits.
• Dolby Pro LogicII can be used to decode not only sources
recorded in Dolby Surround ( ) but also regular stereo
sources into five channels (front left, front right, center,
surround left and surround right) to achieve surround sound.
• Whereas with conventional Dolby Pro Logic the surround
channel playback frequency band was limited, Dolby Pro
LogicII offers a wider band range (20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater).
In addition, the surround channels were monaural (the
surround left and right channels were the same) with
previous Dolby Pro Logic, but Dolby Pro LogicII they are
played as stereo signals.
• Various parameters can be set according to the type of
source and the contents, so it is possible to achieve optimum
decoding ( page 36).
Sources recorded in Dolby Surround
• These are sources in which three or more channels of
surround have been recorded as two channels of signals
using Dolby Surround encoding technology.
• Dolby Surround is used for the sound tracks of movies
recorded on DVDs, LDs and video cassettes to be played
on stereo VCRs, as well as for the stereo broadcast
signals of FM radio, TV, satellite broadcasts and cable TV.
• Decoding these signals with Dolby Pro Logic makes it
possible to achieve multi-channel surround playback. The
signals can also be played on ordinary stereo equipment,
in which case they provide normal stereo sound.
• There are two types of DVD Dolby Surround recording
signals.
q 2-channel PCM stereo signals
w 2-channel Dolby Digital signals
2 Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are
indicated with the logo mark shown below
Dolby Surround support mark:
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
e Dolby Pro LogicIIx
• Dolby Pro LogicIIx furthers the matrix decoding technology
of Dolby Pro LogicII to decode audio signals recorded on two
channels into up to 7.1 playback channels, including the
surround back channel. Dolby Pro LogicIIx also allows 5.1-
channel sources to be played in up to 7.1 channels.
The mode can be selected according to the source. The
Music mode is best suited for playing music, the Cinema
mode for playing movies, and the Game mode for playing
games. The Game mode can only be used with 2-channel
audio sources.
91
Additional Information Additional Information
[2] DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround (also called simply DTS) is a multi-
channel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater
Systems.
DTS offers the same “5.1” playback channels as Dolby
Digital (front left, front right and center, surround left and
surround right) as well as the stereo 2-channel mode. The
signals for the different channels are fully independent,
eliminating the risk of deterioration of sound quality due to
interference between signals, crosstalk, etc.
DTS features a relatively higher bit rate as compared to
Dolby Digital (1234 kbps for CDs and LDs, 1536 kbps for
DVDs) so it operates with a relatively low compression rate.
Because of this the amount of data is great, and when DTS
playback is used in movie theaters, a separate CD-ROM
synchronized with the film is played.
With LDs and DVDs, there is of course no need for an extra
disc; the pictures and sound can be recorded simultaneously
on the same disc, so the discs can be handled in the same
way as discs with other formats.
There are also music CDs recorded in DTS. These CDs
include 5.1-channel surround signals (compared to two
channels on current CDs). They do not include picture data,
but they offer surround playback on CD players that are
equipped with digital outputs (PCM type digital output
required).
DTS surround track playback offers the same intricate, grand
sound as in a movie theater, right in your own listening
room.
2 DTS compatible media and playback methods
Marks indicating DTS compatibility: and .
The following are general examples. Also refer to the player’s
operating instructions.
Media
CD
DVD
DTS Digital output
terminals
Optical or coaxial digital
output
(same as for PCM)
2
Optical or coaxial digital
output
(same as for PCM)
3
Set the input mode to
“AUTO” or “DTS” (
page 29).
Never set the mode to
“ANALOG” or “PCM”.
1
Set the input mode to
“AUTO” or “DTS” (
page 29).
Playback method
(reference page)
1: DTS signals are recorded in the same way on CDs and
LDs as PCM signals. Because of this, the un-decoded DTS
signals are output as random “hissy” noise from the CD
or LD player’s analog outputs. If this noise is played with
the amplifier set at a very high volume, it may possibly
cause damage to the speakers. To avoid this, be sure to
switch the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” before
playing CDs or LDs recorded in DTS. Also, never switch
the input mode to “ANALOG” or “PCM” during playback.
The same holds true when playing CDs or LDs on a DVD
player or LD/DVD compatible player. For DVDs, the DTS
signals are recorded in a special way so this problem does
not occur.
2: The signals provided at the digital outputs of a CD or LD
player may undergo some sort of internal signal
processing (output level adjustment, sampling frequency
conversion, etc.). In this case the DTS-encoded signals
may be processed erroneously, in which case they cannot
be decoded by the AVR-3806, or may only produce noise.
Before playing DTS signals for the first time, turn down
the master volume to a low level, start playing the DTS
disc, then check whether the DTS indicator on the AVR-
3806 ( page 33) lights before turning up the master
volume.
3: A DVD player with DTS-compatible digital output is
required to play DTS DVDs. A DTS Digital Output logo is
featured on the front panel of compatible DVD players.
Recent DENON DVD player models feature DTS-
compatible digital output – consult the player’s owner’s
manual for information on configuring the digital output for
DTS playback of DTS-encoded DVDs.
MANUFACTURED UNDER LICENSE FROM DIGITAL
THEATER SYSTEMS, INC.
U.S. PAT. NO’S. 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,226,616; 6,487,535 AND OTHER U.S. AND WORLD–WIDE
PATENTS ISSUED AND PENDING.
“DTS”, “DTS–ES”, “Neo:6”, AND “DTS 96/24” ARE
TRADEMARKS OF DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS, INC. ©
1996, 2003 DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS, INC. ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED.
[3]DTS-ES
DTS-ES is a new multi-channel digital signal format
developed by Digital Theater Systems Inc. While offering
high compatibility with the conventional DTS Digital Surround
format, DTS-ES greatly improves the 360-degree surround
impression and space expression thanks to further expanded
surround signals. This format has been used professionally in
movie theaters since 1999.
In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C, SL, SR
and LFE), DTS-ES also offers the SB (Surround Back,
sometimes also referred to as “surround center”) channel for
surround playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES
includes two signal formats with different surround signal
recording methods, as described below.
2 DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 is the newest recording format. With it,
all 6.1 channels (including the SB channel) are recorded
independently using a digital discrete system. The main
feature of this format is that because the SL, SR and SB
channels are fully independent, the sound can be designed
with total freedom and it is possible to achieve a sense that
the acoustic images are moving about freely among the
background sounds surrounding the listener from 360
degrees.
Though maximum performance is achieved when sound
tracks recorded with this system are played using a DTS-ES
decoder, when played with a conventional DTS decoder the
SB channel signals are automatically down-mixed to the SL
and SR channels, so none of the signal components are lost.
2 DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
With this format, the additional SB channel signals undergo
matrix encoding and are input to the SL and SR channels
beforehand. Upon playback they are decoded to the SL, SR
and SB channels. The performance of the encoder used at
the time of recording can be fully matched using a high
precision digital matrix decoder developed by DTS, thereby
achieving surround sound more faithful to the producer’s
sound design aims than with conventional 5.1- or 6.1-channel
systems.
In addition, the bit stream format is 100% compatible with
conventional DTS signals, so the effect of the Matrix 6.1
format can be achieved even with 5.1-channel signal sources.
Of course it is also possible to play DTS-ES Matrix 6.1
encoded sources with a DTS 5.1-channel decoder.
92
Additional Information
When DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 or Matrix 6.1 encoded sources
are decoded with a DTS-ES decoder, the format is
automatically detected upon decoding and the optimum
playing mode is selected. However, some Matrix 6.1 sources
may be detected as having a 5.1-channel format, so the DTS-
ES Matrix 6.1 mode must be set manually to play these
sources. (For instructions on selecting the surround mode
( page 35).)
The DTS-ES decoder includes another function, the DTS
Neo:6 surround mode for 6.1-channel playback of digital PCM
and analog signal sources.
2 DTS Neo:6™ surround
This mode applies conventional 2-channel signals to the high
precision digital matrix decoder used for DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 to
achieve 6.1-channel surround playback. High precision input
signal detection and matrix processing enable full band
reproduction (frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or
greater) for all 6.1 channels, and separation between the
different channels is improved to the same level as that of a
digital discrete system.
DTS Neo:6 surround includes two modes for selecting the
optimum decoding for the signal source.
• DTS Neo:6 Cinema
This mode is optimum for playing movies. Decoding is
performed with emphasis on separation performance to
achieve the same atmosphere with 2-channel sources as
with 6.1-channel sources.
This mode is effective for playing sources recorded in
conventional surround formats as well, because the in-phase
component is assigned mainly to the center channel (C) and
the reversed phase component to the surround (SL, SR and
SB channels).
• DTS Neo:6 Music
This mode is suited mainly for playing music. The front
channel (FL and FR) signals bypass the decoder and are
played directly so there is no loss of sound quality, and the
effect of the surround signals output from the center (C) and
surround (SL, SR and SB) channels add a natural sense of
expansion to the sound field.
[4] DTS 96/24
The sampling frequency, number of bits and number of
channels used for recording of music, etc., in studios has
been increasing in recent years, and there are a growing
number of high quality signal sources, including 96 kHz/24 bit
5.1-channel sources.
For example, there are high picture/sound quality DVD video
sources with 96 kHz/24 bit stereo PCM audio tracks.
However, because the data rate for these audio tracks is
extremely high, there are limits to recording them on two
channels only, and since the quality of the pictures must be
restricted it is common to only include still pictures.
In addition, 96 kHz/24 bit 5.1-channel surround is possible
with DVD audio sources, but DVD audio players are required
to play them with this high quality.
DTS 96/24 is a multi-channel digital signal format developed
by Digital Theater Systems Inc. in order to deal with this
situation.
Conventional surround formats used sampling frequencies of
48 or 44.1 kHz, so 20 kHz was about the maximum playback
signal frequency. With DTS 96/24, the sampling frequency is
increased to 96 or 88.2 kHz to achieve a wide frequency
range of over 40 kHz.
In addition, DTS 96/24 has a resolution of 24 bits, resulting in
the same frequency band and dynamic range as 96 kHz/24 bit
PCM.
As with conventional DTS Surround, DTS 96/24 is compatible
with a maximum of 5.1 channels, so sources recorded using
DTS 96/24 can be played in high sampling frequency, multiple
channel audio with such normal media as DVD videos and
CDs.
Thus, with DTS 96/24, the same 96 kHz/24 bit multi-channel
surround sound as with DVD-Audio can be achieved while
viewing DVD-Video images on a conventional DVD-Video
player ( 1). Furthermore, with DTS 96/24 compatible CDs,
88.2 kHz/24 bit multi-channel surround can be achieved using
normal CD/LD players ( 1).
Even with the high quality multi-channel signals, the
recording time is the same as with conventional DTS
surround sources.
What’s more, DTS 96/24 is fully compatible with the
conventional DTS surround format, so DTS 96/24 signal
sources can be played with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz
or 44.1 kHz on conventional DTS or DTS-ES surround
decoders ( 2).
1 A DVD player with DTS digital output capabilities (for
CD/LD players, a player with digital outputs for
conventional DTS CDs/LDs) and a disc recorded in
DTS 96/24 are required.
2 The resolution is 24 or 20 bits, depending on the
decoder.
Audyssey MultEQ XT
There are several factors that can degrade the sound from even
the best loudspeakers in a listening room. One of the most
important is the interaction of sound from the loudspeakers with
large surfaces such as walls, the floor, and the ceiling in the
room. Even with careful loudspeaker placement and acoustical
treatments, there are significant problems that are caused by
room acoustics. These include reflections from nearby surfaces
and standing waves that are created between large parallel
surfaces in the room.
In a home theater the situation is further complicated because
there are several listening locations. The effects of room
acoustics on the sound arriving at each person’s ears are very
different and the result is a listening experience that is degraded
in a different way for every person in the room. It is not
uncommon to have variations in two adjacent seats that are as
large as 10 dB, particularly in the frequency range below 250 Hz.
The solution to this problem is to apply room correction after
precisely measuring how each loudspeaker interacts with the
room. Because the room causes variations in the frequency
response of the loudspeakers that are so large from seat to seat,
it is important to measure each loudspeaker at several locations
in the listening room. This should be done even if there is only
one listener. Measurement at a single location is not
representative of the acoustical problems in the room and will,
in most cases, degrade overall performance.
Audyssey MultEQ XT is the only technology that can achieve
room correction for multiple listeners in a large listening area. It
does so by combining the data collected at several points in the
room from each loudspeaker and then applying correction that
minimizes the acoustical effects of the room and is matched to
the frequency resolution of human perception (known as
psychoacoustics). Furthermore, MultEQ XT correction is applied
both in frequency and time domains and so there are no artifacts
(such as smearing of sound or modal ringing) that are
sometimes associated with traditional methods of room
equalization.
In addition to correcting frequency response problems over a
wide listening area, Audyssey MultEQ XT provides a completely
automated sound system set-up process. It identifies how many
loudspeakers are connected to the amplifiers and whether they
are full-range, satellites, or subwoofers. If there is a least one
subwoofer connected, Audyssey MultEQ XT determines the
optimum crossover frequency between each satellite and the
subwoofer(s). It automatically checks the polarity of each
loudspeaker and alerts the user if there are any that may be
wired out-of-phase relative to the others. It measures the
distance to each loudspeaker from the main listening position
and adjusts the delays so that sound from each loudspeaker
arrives at the same time. Finally, Audyssey MultEQ XT
determines the playback level of each loudspeaker and adjusts
the volume trims so that all levels are equal.
Additional Information
93
Additional Information Additional Information
The two diagrams below illustrate two examples of microphone
placement for two types of seating arrangements. There are six
measuring positions shown in each case. Increasing the number
of measuring points will provide a better sampling of the
listening area and produce better results. The dotted line
represents the area in which the room correction provided by
Audyssey MultEQ XT is optimal. The microphone must be
placed at ear height at each location.
• Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.
It is licensed under US and National Patent Applications
20030235318 and 10/700,220. Additional U.S. and Foreign
Patents pending. MultEQ and the Audyssey MultEQ logo are
trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.. All rights reserved.
HDCD
®
(High Definition Compatible
Digital
®
)
HDCD is an encoding/decoding technology that greatly reduces
the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while
maintaining compatibility with the conventional CD format, thus
expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution.
Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identified
automatically to select the optimum digital processing.
•
®
, HDCD
®
, High Definition Compatible Digital
®
and
Microsoft
®
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries. HDCD system manufactured under license from
Microsoft Corporation, Inc. This product is covered by one or
more of the following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074,
5,640,161, 5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311,
5,872,531, and in Australia: 669114. Other patents pending.
DENON LINK (DENON Digital Link)
High-grade LPCM 24-bit, 96-kHz, 6-channel or 24-bit, 192-kHz, 2-
channel digital input is possible when the AVR-3806 is
connected via a shielded twisted pair (STP) cable to a DENON
DVD player that supports Denon Digital Link, Since DENON
Digital Link uses low-voltage differential signaling (LVDS),
transfer capabilities of greater than 1.2 Gbps at a differential
voltage of approximately 0.3Vpp are possible.
About HDMI
“HDMI” is the abbreviation of “High Definition Multimedia
Interface”.
This is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs
developed based on the DVI (Digital Visual Interface) used for
computer displays, etc., and optimized for use in non-
professional equipment. With it, non-compressed digital video
and multi-channel audio signals can be transferred with a single
connector, eliminating the need to use separate cables for the
picture and sound and making it possible to make connectors
smaller. HDMI is also compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Contents Protection), a technology for protecting
copyrights that encrypts digital video signals in the same was as
with DVI.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
AL24 Plus (AL24 Processing Plus)
2 AL24 Processing for All Channels
DENON has further developed its proprietary AL24
Processing, an analog waveform reproduction technology, to
support the 192-kHz sampling frequency of DVD-Audio. AL24
Processing Plus, thoroughly suppresses quantization noise
associated with D/A conversion of LPCM signals to
reproduce the low-level signals with optimum clarity that will
bring out all the delicate nuances of the music.
Equipped foe not only front left and right channels but also
for the surround left and right, center and subwoofer
channels.
Surround Mode
94
Additional Information Additional Information
Surround modes and parameters
C : Signal / Adjustable
E : No signal / Not adjustable
B : Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting
C : Able
E : Unable
NOTE1 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE 0 dB
NOTE2 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE +4 dB
NOTE3 : This parameter is availabe when the “MODE” is set to “CINEMA”.
NOTE4 : This parameter is availabe when the “MODE” is set to “CINEMA” or “PL”.
*1:
When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
*2:
When playing Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-audio and Super Audio CD.
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (CINEMA)
C (CINEMA))
C (CINEMA)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (OFF)
C (NOTE3)
C (NOTE4)
C (NOTE3)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (0 dB)
E
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (NOTE1)
C (NOTE2)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
E
E
C
C
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (ON)
C (ON)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
E
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
E
E
E
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (0 dB)
C (OFF)
E
E
E
C (OFF)
E
E
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
E
E
B
B
E
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
E
E
E
B
B
E
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
SURROUND
L/R
Signals and adjustability in the different modes
Channel output Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)
SUB-
WOOFER
D. COMP
*1
NIGHT
mode
LFE
*2
AFDM
*1
SB CH OUT
(MODE)
TONE
CONTROL
CINEMA
EQ.
MODE
(DECODER)
ROOM
SIZE
E
E
B
B
E
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (Medium)
C (Medium)
C (Medium)
C (Medium)
C (Medium)
C (Medium)
E
E
Dolby Digital
EFFECT
LEVEL
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (ON, 10)
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (10)
C (10)
C (10)
C (10)
C (10)
C (10)
E
E
FRONT L/R
CENTER
SURROUND
BACK L/R
PURE DIRECT, DIRECT
DSD DIRECT
DSD MULTI DIRECT
MULTI CH DIRECT
STEREO
EXT.IN
MULTI CH IN
WIDE SCREEN
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
IIx
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
II
DTS NEO:6
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS SURROUND
7CH STEREO
SUPER STADIUM
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
CLASSIC CONCERT
MONO MOVIE
VIDEO GAME
MATRIX
VIRTURL
C (OFF)
E
E
E
C (OFF)
E
E
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
95
Additional Information Additional Information
C : Signal / Adjustable
E : No signal / Not adjustable
B : Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting
C : Adjustable
E : Not adjustable
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (0.3)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (3)
C (3)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (3)
C (3)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (30 msec)
E
Surround Mode
DELAY TIME
PANORAMA
Signals and adjustability in the different modes
Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)
SUBWOOFER
ON/OFF
DIMENSION
CENTER
WIDTH
CENTER
IMAGE
SW ATT
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C (OFF)
C (OFF)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
PRO LOGIC
II/IIx MUSIC MODE only
NEO:6 MUSIC
MODE only
EXT. IN only
PURE DIRECT, DIRECT
DSD DIRECT
DSD MULTI DIRECT
MULTI CH DIRECT
STEREO
EXT.IN
MULTI CH IN
WIDE SCREEN
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
IIx
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
II
DTS NEO:6
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS SURROUND
7CH STEREO
SUPER STADIUM
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
CLASSIC CONCERT
MONO MOVIE
VIDEO GAME
MATRIX
VIRTURL
96
Additional Information Additional Information
2 Differences in surround mode names depending on the input signals
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
4
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
4
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
E
E
E
E
4
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
4
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
4
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
4 B
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
4
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
4
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
4
E
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
4 B
C
E
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
4 B
E
C
E
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
Surround Mode
Super Audio CD
Button
Note
DTS ES DSCRT
(With Flag)
Input signals
DTS DOLBY DIGITAL
STANDARD
DTS SURROUND
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
DTS ES MTRX6.1
DTS SURROUND
DTS 96/24
DTS + PL
IIx CINEMA
DTS + PL
IIx MUSIC
DTS + NEO:6
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL+PL
IIx CINEMA
DOLBY DIGITAL+PL
IIx MUSIC
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
IIx CINEMA
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
IIx MUSIC
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
IIx GAME
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
II CINEMA
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
II MUSIC
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
II GAME
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
MULTI IN + PL
IIx CINEMA
MULTI IN + PL
IIx MUSIC
ANALOG
LINEAR
PCM
DTS ES MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS
96/24
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY DIGITAL
EX
(With no Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(3, 4, 5ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
DVD-AUDIO
DVD-Audio
(multi ch)
DVD-
Audio
(2ch)
176.4/
192kHz
DSD
(multi ch)
DSD
(2ch)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
4 : Mode selectable in initial status
B : Mode fixed when AFDM is ON
C : Selectable mode
E : Non-selectable mode
NOTE :
*1: This mode is not available when the Surround Back speaker setup is set to “None”.
*2: This mode is not available when the Surround Back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”.
97
Additional Information Additional Information
STEREO
Surround Mode
Super Audio CD
Button
Note
DTS ES DSCRT
(With Flag)
Input signals
DTS DOLBY DIGITAL
ANALOG
LINEAR
PCM
DTS ES MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS
96/24
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY DIGITAL
EX
(With no Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(3, 4, 5ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
DVD-AUDIO
DVD-Audio
(multi ch)
DVD-
Audio
(2ch)
176.4/
192kHz
DSD
(multi ch)
DSD
(2ch)
E
E
C
C
C
C
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
4
E
E
E
C
C
C
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
4
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
4
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
4
*2
*1
*2
*1
C
*3
DIRECT
DIRECT
DSD DIRECT
DSD MULTI DIRECT
MULTI CH DIRECT
M DIRECT + PL
IIx CINEMA
M DIRECT + PL
IIx MUSIC
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
DSD PURE DIRECT
DSD MULTI PURE
MULTI CH PURE DIRECT
M PURE D + PL
II
x CINEMA
M PURE D + PL
II
x MUSIC
DSP SIMULATION
WIDE SCREEN
SUPER STADIUM
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
CLASSIC CONCERT
MONO MOVIE
VIDEO GAME
MATRIX
VIRTUAL
7CH STEREO
STEREO
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
4
4 : Mode selectable in initial status
C : Selectable mode
E : Non-selectable mode
NOTE :
*1: This mode is not available when the Surround Back speaker setup is set to “None”.
*2: This mode is not available when the Surround Back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”.
*3: If the Surround Back speaker setup is set to “None”, then “5CH STEREO” is displayed.
98
Additional Information Additional Information
ON
EE
✳3
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Video convert
EE
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT
EE
EE
EE
EE
CC
(1080p)
CC
(480i/576i)
Input signals
S-VIDEO VIDEO
EE EE
EE CC
CC EE
CC CC
EE EE
CC
(480p ~ 720p)
EE EE
EE EE
HDMI
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
COMPONENT
EE
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
MONITOR OUT
S-VIDEO VIDEO
EE EE
VIDEO VIDEO
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
EE EE
COMPONENT
EE EE
COMPONENT COMPONENT
HDMI
EE
EE
CC
(1080p)
CC
(480p ~ 720p)
CC
(480i/576i)
CC
(480p ~ 720p)
EE CC
EE CC
EE CC
CC
(1080p)
CC EE
CC EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳2
VIDEO VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
CC
(480i/576i)
CC
(1080p)
CC
(480p ~ 720p)
EE
CC EE
CC CC
CC CC
CC
(480i/576i)
CC CC
EE EE
EE
EE
EE
CC
EECC
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳2
EE
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
EE EE
HDMI
EE
EE
CC
(480i/576i)
EE CC
CC EE
CC CC
CC
(Other than 480i/576i)
EE EE
EE EE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO VIDEO
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
EE EE
COMPONENT COMPONENT
HDMI ✳1
HDMI ✳2
HDMI ✳2
HDMI
HDMI
CC
(480p ~ 720p)
CC
(480i/576i)
CC
(Other than 480i/576i)
CC
(Other than 480i/576i)
EE
EE
CC
EE CC
CC EE
CC
(480i/576i)
CC EE
CC CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳2
EE
✳3
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
HDMI ✳1
HDMI ✳1
HDMI ✳1
HDMI ✳2
HDMI ✳2
HDMI ✳2
CC
(480i/576i)
CC
COMPONENT ✳2
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMI ✳2
CC
CC
480p ~ 720p : 480p/576p/1080i/720p
CC
Relationship between the video input signal and monitor output according to the video convert
settings
CC
(1080p)
EE
: Not output
✳1 : On screen display superimposed on video signal and output.
✳2 : On screen display superimposed on S-Video signal and output.
✳3 : Video signals are output when the analog to HDMI convert
function is set to “OFF”.
COMPONENT : On screen display only displayed for SETUP, SURROUND
PARAMETER and ON SCREEN buttons.
HDMI : The on-screen display is displayed when the analog to HDMI
convert function is set to “ON”.
: Video signals are not output when the analog to HDMI
convert function is set to “OFF”.
CC
: Signal input
EE
: No signal
• The MAIN ZONE video conversion function is compatible with the following
format: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.
• When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output
in PAL format from the S-Video connector.
• Signals up-converted to HDMI are output to the HDMI monitor with the
resolution at which they are input. Note that resolutions of 1080p are not
handled.
99
Additional Information Additional Information
Video convert
–
–
VIDEO
OFF
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
COMPONENT
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
CC
Input signals
S-VIDEO VIDEO
EE EE
EE CC
CC EE
CC CC
CC CC
CC EE EE
EE CC
HDMI
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
COMPONENT
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
COMPONENT ✳1
MONITOR OUT
S-VIDEO
EE EE
EE
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
EE
S-VIDEO
VIDEO ✳2
– VIDEO
COMPONENT
EE EE
EE
VIDEO
HDMI
EE
EE
CC
CC
CC
EE
CC EE
CC CC
CC
CC
EE EE EE
EE CC
EE
EE
EE
CC
CC
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳1
EE
S-VIDEO
EE
S-VIDEO
VIDEO ✳2
– VIDEO
EE EE EE
EE
VIDEO
EE
EE
EE
CC EE
CC CC
CC CC
CC EE EE
CC
CC
CC
CC
EE
EE
EE
S-VIDEO
EE
S-VIDEO
VIDEO ✳2
– VIDEO
COMPONENT
EE EE
S-VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
–
Used
Not used
–
–
–
Used
Not used
–
–
Used
Not used
–
–
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
CC
CC
EE CC
CC EE
CC CC
CC CC CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
COMPONENT ✳1
COMPONENT ✳2
COMPONENT ✳2
EE
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
EE
S-VIDEO
VIDEO ✳2
COMPONENT ✳1
– VIDEO
–
–
Used
Not used
CC
HDMI
EE
: Not output
✳1 : On screen display superimposed on video signal and output.
✳2 : On screen display superimposed on S-Video signal and output.
✳3 : Video signals are output when the analog to HDMI convert
function is set to “OFF”.
COMPONENT : On screen display only displayed for SETUP, SURROUND
PARAMETER and ON SCREEN buttons.
HDMI : The on-screen display is displayed when the analog to HDMI
convert function is set to “ON”.
CC
: Signal input
EE
: No signal
100
Specifications
Specifications
2 Audio section
• Power amplifier
Rated output: Front:
120 W + 120 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
160 W + 160 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Center:
120 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
160W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround (A, B):
120 W + 120 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
160 W + 160 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround Back:
120 W + 120 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
160 W + 160 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Dynamic power: 140 W x 2 ch (8 Ω/ohms)
210 W x 2 ch (4 Ω/ohms)
Output terminals: Front, Center, Surr. Back 6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms
Surround: A or B 6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms
A + B 8 ~ 16 Ω/ohms
• Analog
Input sensitivity / input impedance: 200 mV / 47 kΩ/kohms
Frequency response: 10 Hz ~ 100 kHz: +0, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)
S/N: 102 dB (DIRECT mode)
Distortion: 0.005% (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)
Rated output: 1.2 V
• Digital
D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
Dynamic range — 96 dB
Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface
• Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)
Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV
RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
S/N: 74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)
Rated output / Maximum output: 150 mV / 8 V
Distortion factor: 0.03% (1 kHz, 3 V)
2 Video section
• Standard video terminals
Input / output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response: 5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB
• S-Video terminals
Input / output level and impedance: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
C (color) signal — 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response: 5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB
• Color component video terminal
Input / output level and impedance: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
P
B/CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
P
R/CR signal — 0.7Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response: 5 Hz ~ 100 MHz — +0, –3 dB
2 Tuner section [FM] [AM]
(note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10
–15
W)
Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz ~ 107.9 MHz 520 kHz ~ 1710 kHz
Usable Sensitivity: 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) 18 µV
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: MONO 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)
STEREO 23 µV (38.5 dBf)
S/N (IHF-A): MONO 77 dB
STEREO 72 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): MONO 0.15%
STEREO 0.3%
2 General
Power supply: AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption: 7.1 A
Maximum external dimensions: 434 (W) x 171 (H) x 429 (D) mm (17-3/32” x 6-47/64” x 16-57/64”)
Mass: 17.5 kg (38 lbs 9,30 oz)
2 Remote control unit (RC-1024)
Batteries: LR6/AA Type (two batteries)
External dimensions: 63 (W) x 238 (H) x 31 (D) mm (2-31/64” x 9-3/8” x 1-7/32”)
Mass: 190 g (Approx. 6.7 oz) (including batteries)
* For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
2 List of preset codes / Liste de codes préréglés
Clayton 40713
Coby 40730, 40770, 40778, 40852, 41086,
41107, 41115, 41165, 41177, 41351
Compacks 40826, 41265
Conia 40516, 40672, 40798, 40852, 41004
Continental Edison 40768, 40831
Craig 40831
Crown 40690, 40769, 40770, 41115
Curtis Mathes 41087
Cybercom 40831
CyberHome 40816, 40874, 41023, 41024, 41117,
41129
Cydectin 41074
Cytron 40651, 40774
D-Vision 41115
Daenyx 40872
Daewoo 40705, 40770, 40784, 40833, 40869,
40872, 41169, 41172, 41234, 41242
Daewoo International 40872
Dansai 40770, 40783, 41115
Dantax 40539, 40713, 40790, 41089
Daytek 40872
Dayton 40872
DCE 40831
DEC 40774, 40778
Decca 40770, 41115
Denon
40490, 40634, *[41470], 41634
Denver 40699, 40778, 41107, 41165, 41353,
41359
Desav 40770
Desay 40800, 41407
Diamond 40651, 40768, 40790
Dick Smith Electronics
40833, 41730
Digihome 40713
digiRED 40717
DVD
3D Lab 40539
Acoustic Solutions 40713, 40730, 41242
Advent 41016
AEG 40770, 40790
AFK 41051
Afreey 40698
Aim 40699, 40778, 40833, 41165
Airis 41250
Aiwa 40533, 40641
Akai 40690, 40705, 40770, 40790, 40884,
40899, 41089, 41115
Akira 40699
Akura 41051
Alba 40539, 40672, 40695, 40699, 40713,
40717, 40730, 40783, 41051
Alco 40790
Allegro 40869
Amitech 40770, 40784, 40850
Amphion Media Works
40872
Amstrad 40713
AMW 40872
Ansonic 40774, 40831
Apex 40672, 41061
Apex Digital 40672, 40717, 40755, 40794, 40796,
40797, 40830, 41004, 41020, 41056,
41061, 41100
Arianet 40770
Aspire Digital 41168, 41407
Audiosonic 40690, 41265
Audiovox 40717, 40790, 41041, 41071, 41072,
41121, 41122
Awa 40730, 40872
Axion 40730, 41071, 41072
B & K 40655, 40662
Basic Line 40713
Baze 41165
Bellagio 41004
Black Diamond 40698, 40713, 40833, 40884
Blaupunkt 40717
Blue Parade 40571
Blue Sky 40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40769,
40778, 40804
Boghe 41004
Boman 40783
Brainwave 40770, 41115
Brandt 40503, 40651
Broksonic 40695, 40868
Bush 40516, 40672, 40690, 40695, 40699,
40713, 40717, 40730, 40778, 40831,
40833, 40884, 41051, 41165
C-Tech 40798
Cambridge Soundworks
40690
Cat 40699, 41087
CAVS 41057
CCE 40730
Celestial 41020
Centrex 40672, 41004
Centrum 40713
CGV 41115
Changhong 40627, 41061
Cinea 40831
Cineral 40730
Cinetec 40713
cineULTRA 40699
CineVision 40833, 40869, 40876
Citizen 41277
Classic 40730, 41730
Clatronic 40672, 41165
Digitor 40651, 40690
Digitrex 40672, 41056, 41100
DIGIXmedia 40826
DiK 40774, 40831
Disney 40675, 41270
DiViDo 40705
DK Digital 40831
DMTech 40783
Dragon 40831
DSE 40833, 41730
Dual 40651, 40713, 40730, 40783, 40790,
40831, 41068, 41085
Durabrand 40713, 40831, 41003, 41127
DVD2000 40521
DVX 40768
ECC 40730
Electrohome 40770, 40784
Elfunk 40850
Elin 40770
Ellion 40850
Elta 40672, 40690, 40770, 40850, 41051,
41115
Emerson 40591, 40675, 40705, 40816, 40821,
41268
Encore 40698
Enterprise 40591
Enzer 40770, 40784
EuroLine 41115
Fenner 40651, 40769
Ferguson 40651
Finlux 40591, 40672, 40741, 40770, 40783,
41165
Fintec 40784, 41169
Firstline 40651, 40713, 40869
Fisher 40670
Funai 40675, 40695, 41334
Gateway 41073, 41077, 41158
GE 40522, 40717, 40815
General Electric 40717
Global Solutions 40768
Go Video 40715, 40741, 40744, 40783, 40833,
40869, 41044, 41075, 41099, 41144,
41158, 41304, 41730
Go Vision 41071, 41072
GoldStar 40591, 40741
Goodmans 40651, 40690, 40713, 40730, 40783,
40790, 40833, 41004, 41730
GPX 40699, 40769
Gradiente 40651
Gran Prix 40831
Grandin 40672, 40713
Greenhill 40717
Grundig 40539, 40651, 40670, 40695, 40705,
40713, 40790, 41004, 41730
Grunkel 40770
GVG 41169
H & B 40850
H&B 40713, 40850
Hanseatic 40741, 40783
Harman/Kardon 40582, 40702
HDT 40705
Hen 40713
Hher 40651, 40713, 40826, 40831
Hitachi 40573, 40664, 40695, 40713, 41247
Hiteker 40672, 40872
Home Electronics 40730
Home Tech 41107
Humax 40646
Hyundai 40768, 40783, 40850
I-Lo 41348
iLo 41348
Initial 40717, 40839
Integra 40571, 40627, 41634
IRT 40783
ISP 40695
Jaton 41078
JBL 40702
Jeken 40699
Jensen 41016
Jepssen 41250
JMB 40695
JNC 40672
JSI 41423
JVC 40503, 40539, 40558, 40623, 40867,
41164
jWin 41049, 41051
Karcher 40783
Kawasaki 40790
Kendo 40699, 40713, 40831
Kennex 40713, 40770
Kenwood 40490, 40534
Kiiro 40770
KLH 40717, 40790, 41020, 41149
KLH Digital 40717
Konka 40711, 40719, 40720, 40721
Koss 40651, 40896, 41423
Landel 40826
Lasonic 40798, 41173
Lawson 40768
Lenco 40651, 40699, 40713, 40770, 40774,
40778, 41165
Lenoxx 40690, 41127
Lexia 40699, 40768
LG 40591, 40741, 40790, 40801, 40869,
40036
Lifetec 40651, 40831
Limit 40768
LiteOn 41058, 41158, 41416, 41440
Loewe 40511, 40539, 40741
Logix 40705, 40783
Lumatron 40705, 40741, 40833, 41115
Lunatron 40741
Luxman 40573
Luxor 40713, 41004, 41730
Magnasonic 40651, 40769
Magnavox 40503, 40539, 40646, 40675, 40713,
40821
Magnex 41165
Malata 40782, 41159
Manhattan 40705, 40713
Marantz 40539
Mark 40713
Marquant 40770
Matsui 40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40884,
41004, 41730
Maxim 40713, 40872
MBO 40690, 40730, 41730
MDS 40778
Mecotek 40770
Medion 40630, 40651, 40770, 40774, 40783,
40820, 40831
MEI 40790
Memorex 40695, 40831, 41270
Metronic 40690
Metz 40525, 40571, 40713
Micromedia 40503, 40539
Micromega 40539
Microsoft 40522
Microstar 40831
Minato
40752
Minax 40713
Minerva 40705
Minoka 40770
Minowa 41165
Mintek
40717, 40839
Mirror 40752
Mitsubishi 40521, 40713, 41403, 41521
Mizuda 40770
Momitsu 41082
MTlogic 41265
Mustek 40730, 41730
Mx Onda 40651
NAD 40591, 40692, 40741
Naiko 40770, 41004
Narita 41115
NEC 40591, 40692, 40785, 40869, 41404
Nesa 40717
Nevir 40770, 40831
NextBase 40826
NexxTech 41402
Nintaus 41051
Norcent 40872, 41003, 41107, 41265
Nordmende 40774, 40831
Noriko 40752
Nu-Tec 40516
Okano 40752
Olidata 40672
Omni 40690, 40698, 40778, 40833
Onix 40672, 40852
Onkyo 40503, 40627, 40792
Oopla 41158
Optimus 40525
OptoMedia Electronics
40896
Orion 40695
Oritron 40651
Ormond 40713
Otic 40826
P&B 40770
Pacific 40695, 40713, 40768, 40774, 40790,
40804, 40831
Packard Bell 40770
Palladium 40695
Palsonic 40672, 40852
Panasonic 40490, 40503, 40703, 41362, 41462,
41490, 41762
Panda 40717
Philco 40690, 40790
Philips 40503, 40539, 40646, 40675, 40854,
41158, 41260, 41267, 41354
Phonotrend 40672, 40699, 41165
Pioneer 40490, 40525, 40571, 40631
Plu2 40850
Pointer 40784
Polaroid 41020, 41061, 41086
Polk Audio 40539
Portland 40770
Powerpoint 40872
Powtek 40852
Prima 41016
Prinz 40831
Prism 40705
Proline 40651, 40672, 40833, 41004
Proscan 40522
Proson 40713
Prosonic 40752
ProVision 40699, 40778
Qwestar 40651
Radionette 40741, 40869
RCA
40522, 40571, 40717, 40769, 40790,
40822, 41022, 41132
REC 40490
Recco 40698
Red Star 40770, 41003
Reoc 40752, 40768
Resonance 40651
Revoy 40699
Rio 40869
RJTech 41360
Roadstar 40690, 40699, 40713, 40730, 40833,
41051
Ronin 40872
Rotel 40558, 40623
Rowa 40516, 40717, 40823, 40872, 41004
Saba 40651, 40769
Sabaki 40798
Saivod 40831
Sakyno 40768
Salora 40741
Sampo 40698, 40752
Samsung 40490, 40573, 40744, 40820, 40899,
41044, 41075
Sansui 40695, 40768, 40784
Sanyo 40670, 40695, 40873
Scan 40705, 40850
ScanMagic 40730
Schaub Lorenz 40770, 41115
Schneider 40539, 40651, 40705, 40713, 40774,
40783, 40790, 40804, 40831
Schwaiger 40752
Scientific Labs 40768, 40798
Scott 40651, 40672, 40797
SEG 40713, 40768, 40798, 40872, 40884
Semp 40503
Sensory Science 41158
Shanghai 40672
Sharp 40630, 40675, 40713, 40752, 41256
Sharper Image 41117
Sherwood 40633, 40717, 40741, 40770, 41043,
41077
Shinco 40717
Shinsonic 40533, 40839
Silva 40831
Silva Schneider 40831
Singer 40690, 40768
Skantic 40539, 40713, 41003
Skymaster 40730, 40768
Slim Art 40784
Slim Devices 40533
SM Electronic 40690, 40730, 40768
Smart 40705, 40713
Sonai 40755
Sonashi 40831
Sonic Blue 40783, 40869, 41099
Sony 40533, 40573, 40864, 41033, 41431,
41533
Soundmaster 40768
Soundmax 40768
Soundwave 40783
Sova 41122
Spectra 40872
Standard 40651, 40768, 40831
Star Cluster 40768
Strong 40713
Sungale 41074
Sunkai 40770, 40850
Sunstech 40831
Superscan 40821
Supervision 40768
SVA 40672, 40717, 40860, 41105
Sylvania 40630, 40675, 40821, 41268
Symphonic 40675
Synn 40768
Tandberg 40713
Tatung 40770
Teac 40516, 40571, 40692, 40695, 40717,
40741, 40768, 40790, 40809, 40833,
41051
Technics 40490, 40703
Technika 40768, 40770, 40831, 41115, 41165
Technisson 41115
Technosonic 40730, 41051, 41115
Techwood 40692, 40713
Tedelex 40690, 40768, 41004
Telefunken 40770, 40790, 40833
Teletech 40713, 40768
Tensai 40651, 40690, 40770
Terapin 41031
Tevion 40651, 40768, 40798, 40833
Theta Digital 40571
Thomson 40522
Tokai 40698, 40784, 40790
Tokaido 40698
Toshiba 40503, 40695, 41045, 41154
Trans Continens 40826
TRANS-continents 40826, 40831, 40872
Transonic 40672, 40730, 41165
Tredex 40800, 40803, 40804
Trio 40770, 40784
TYT 40705
Umax 40690
United 40672, 40695, 40768, 40826, 40852,
41115, 41165
Universal Multimedia 40768
Universum 40591, 40713, 40741, 40869
Urban Concepts 40503
US Logic 40839
V 41064
Venturer 40790
Vestel 40713
Vieta 40705
VInc 41064, 41226
Vizio 41064, 41226
Vocopro 41027
Voxson 40690, 40730, 40774, 40831
Walkvision 40717
Welkin 40831
Wellington 40713
Wesder 40699
Wharfedale 40698, 40752, 40768, 40790
Wilson 40831
Windsor 40713
Windy Sam 40573
WIZE 41115
Xbox 40522
Xenius 40651, 40790
XLogic 40768, 40798
XMS 40770
Xoro 41173, 41250
Yakumo 41004, 41056
Yamada 40872, 41004, 41056, 41158
Yamaha 40490, 40539, 40545, 40646
Yamakawa 40872
Yukai 40730, 41730
Zenith 40503, 40591, 40741, 40869
Zeus 40784
Zoece 41265
DVDR
Apex Digital 41056
Aspire Digital 41168
Coby 41086
CyberHome 41129
Denon 40490
Dick Smith Electronics
41730
Digitrex 41056
DSE 41730
Funai 40675, 41334
Gateway 41073, 41158
Go Video 40741, 41158, 41304, 41730
iLo 41348
JVC 41164
LG 40741
LiteOn 41158, 41416, 41440
Loewe 40741
Magnavox 40646
Mitsubishi 41403
Mustek 41730
NEC 41404
Panasonic 40490
Philips 40646, 41158
Pioneer 40631
Polaroid 41086
RCA 40522
Samsung 40490
Sensory Science 41158
Sharp 40675
Sony 41033, 41431
Sylvania 40675
Zenith 40741
VCR
ABS 21972
Accent 20072
Admiral 20048, 20209, 20479
Adventura 20000
Adyson 20072
Aiko 20278
Aim 20209, 20278, 20642
Aiwa 20000, 20032, 20037, 20124, 20209,
20315, 20348, 20479
Akai 20037, 20041, 20081, 20175, 20240,
20315, 20348, 20642
Akashi 20072
Akiba 20072
Akura 20072
Alba 20000, 20072, 20081, 20209, 20278,
20315, 20348
Alienware 21972
Allstar 20081
America Action 20278
American High 20035
Amoisonic 20479
Amstrad 20000, 20072, 20278
Anam 20037, 20162, 20226, 20240, 20278
Anam National 20162, 20226, 21562
Anitech 20072
Ansonic 20000
Apelsound 20209
Aristona 20081
ASA 20037, 20081
Asha 20240
Asuka 20037, 20038
Audiosonic 20072, 20278
Audiovox 20037, 20278
Awa 20037, 20043, 20278, 20642
Baird 20000, 20041, 20104
Basic Line 20046, 20072, 20104, 20278
Beaumark 20240
Beko 20104
Bell & Howell 20104
Bestar 20278
Black Diamond 20081, 20642
Black Panther 20278
Blaupunkt 20081, 20162, 20226
Blue Sky 20037, 20072, 20209, 20278, 20348,
20642
Bondstec 20072
Brandt 20041, 20320
Brandt Electronic 20041
Brandt Electronique 20041
Brinkmann 20209, 20348
Broksonic 20002, 20121, 20184, 20209, 20348,
20479, 21479
Bush 20000, 20072, 20081, 20209, 20278,
20315, 20348, 20642
Calix 20037
Canon 20035
Carena 20209
Carrefour 20045
Carver 20081
Casio 20000
Cathay 20278
CCE 20072, 20278
CGE 20000
Changhong 20048, 20081
Cimline 20072
Cineral 20278
Citizen 20037, 20278, 21278
Clatronic 20000, 20072
Colt 20072
Condor 20278
Craig 20037, 20047, 20072, 20240
Crown 20037, 20072, 20278
Curtis Mathes 20035, 20041, 20060, 20162, 21035
Cybernex 20240
CyberPower 21972
Cyrus 20081
Daewoo 20045, 20046, 20104, 20209, 20278,
20642, 21278
Dansai 20072, 20278
Daytron 20278
De Graaf 20042, 20046, 20048, 20081, 20104
Decca 20000, 20067, 20081, 20209, 20348
Deitron 20278
Dell 21972
Denko 20072
Denon 20042
Diamant 20037
Diamond 20209, 20348
Dick Smith Electronics
20642
Digitor 20642
DirecTV 20739
Domland 20209
DSE 20642
Dual 20000, 20041, 20081, 20278, 20348
Dumont 20000, 20081, 20104
Durabrand 20038, 20039
Dynatech 20000
Elbe 20038, 20278
Elcatech 20072
Electrohome 20037
Electrophonic 20037
Elin 20240
Elsay 20072
Elta 20072, 20278
Emerex 20032
Emerson 20000, 20002, 20035, 20037, 20043,
20045, 20072, 20121, 20184, 20209,
20240, 20278, 20294, 20479, 21278,
21479
ESC 20240, 20278
Ferguson 20000, 20041, 20278, 20320
Fidelity 20000, 20072, 20240, 20278, 20432
Finlandia 20000, 20037, 20042, 20043, 20046,
20048, 20081, 20104, 20226
Finlux 20000, 20042, 20081, 20104, 20315
Firstline 20037, 20043, 20045, 20072, 20209,
20278, 20348
Fisher 20046, 20047, 20104
Flint 20209, 20348
Frontech 20072
Fuji 20033, 20035
Fujitsu 20000, 20045
Fujitsu General 20037
Funai 20000, 21333
Galaxis 20278
Garrard 20000
Gateway 21972
GE 20035, 20048, 20060, 20209, 20226,
20240, 20320, 20807, 21035, 21060
GEC 20081
General 20045
General Technic 20348
Genexxa 20104
Gessen 20278
Go Video 20432
GoldHand 20072
GoldStar 20037, 20038, 20209, 20225, 20226,
20348, 21237
Goodmans 20000, 20037, 20072, 20081, 20209,
20278, 20348, 20642
GPX 20037
Gradiente 20000
Graetz 20041, 20104, 20240
Granada 20000, 20037, 20042, 20046, 20048,
20081, 20104, 20226, 20240
Grandin 20000, 20037, 20072, 20209, 20278
Gronic 20104
Grundig 20072, 20081, 20226, 20320, 20347,
20348
Haaz 20348
Hanseatic 20037, 20038, 20081, 20209
Haojie 20240
Harley Davidson 20000
Harman/Kardon 20038, 20081
Harwood 20072
HCM 20072
Headquarter 20046
Hewlett Packard 21972
Hher 20278, 20642
HI-Q 20047
Hinari 20041, 20072, 20240, 20278
Hischito 20045
Hitachi *[20000], 20037, 20041, 20042, 20046,
20081, 20089, 20240, 20040
Hornyphon 20081
Howard Computers 21972
HP 21972
Hughes Network Systems
20042, 20739
Humax 20739
Hush 21972
Hypson 20000, 20037, 20072, 20209, 20278
iBUYPOWER 21972
Imperial 20000
Ingersoll 20209, 20240
Inno Hit 20072, 20432
inotech 20278
Interbuy 20072
Interfunk 20081, 20104
Internal 20278
International 20037, 20278, 20642
Intervision 20000, 20209, 20278
IR 20041, 20042, 20045, 20047, 20072,
20081, 20104, 20209, 20226, 20240,
20348
Irradio 20072, 20081
ITT 20041, 20046, 20104, 20240
ITV 20037, 20278
JBL 20278
Jensen 20041
JMB 20209, 20348
Joyce 20000
JVC 20041, 20045, 20067, 20081, 21008,
21283
Kaisui 20072
Kambrook 20037
Karcher 20081, 20278
KEC 20037, 20278
Kendo 20072, 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348,
20642
Kenwood 20038, 20041, 20067
KIC 20000
Kimari 20047
Kioto 20348
KLH 20072
Kneissel 20037, 20209, 20278, 20348
Kodak 20035, 20037
Kolin 20041, 20043
Kolster 20209
Korpel 20072
Kuba Electronic 20047
Kyoto 20072
Lenco 20278
Leyco 20072
LG 20037, 20038, 20042, 20045, 20209,
21237
Lifetec 20209, 20348
Linksys 21972
Lloyd's 20000
Loewe 20037, 20081, 20162, 21562
Logik 20072, 20209, 20240
Lux May 20072
Luxor 20043, 20046, 20047, 20048, 20104,
20315
LXI 20037
M Electronic 20000, 20038
Magnasonic 20278, 21278
Magnavox 20000, 20035, 20039, 20081, 20149,
20642, 21781
Magnin 20240
Magnum 20642
Manesth 20045, 20072, 20081, 20209
Marantz 20035, 20038, 20081, 20209
Mark 20000, 20278
Marta 20037
Mastec 20642
Master's 20278
Matsui 20209, 20240, 20278, 20348
Matsushita 20035, 20162, 20226
Media Center PC 21972
Medion 20209, 20348, 20642
MEI 20035
Melectronic 20000, 20037, 20038
Memorex 20000, 20035, 20037, 20039, 20046,
20047, 20048, 20104, 20162, 20209,
20240, 20348, 20479, 21237
Memphis 20072
Metronic 20081
Metz 20037, 20081, 20162, 20226, 20347,
21562
MGA 20043, 20240
MGN Technology 20240
Micormay 20348
Micromaxx 20209, 20348
Microsoft 21972
Mind 21972
Minolta 20042
Mitsubishi 20000, 20041, 20043, 20048, 20067,
20081, 20642, 20807
Motorola 20035, 20048
MTC 20000, 20240
Multitec 20037
Multitech 20000, 20072, 20278
Murphy 20000
Myryad 20081
NAD 20104
Naiko 20642
National 20162, 20226, 20240
Nebula Electronics 20033
NEC 20035, 20037, 20038, 20041, 20048,
20067, 20104, 20209, 20278
Neckermann 20081
Nesco 20072
Neufunk 20209
Newave 20037
Nikkai 20072, 20278
Nikko 20037
Niveus Media 21972
Noblex 20240
Nokia 20041, 20042, 20046, 20048, 20081,
20104, 20240, 20278, 20315
Nordmende 20041, 20067, 20320
Northgate 21972
Novatronic 20209
Nu-Tec 20209
Oceanic 20000, 20041, 20046, 20048, 20081,
20104
Okano 20072, 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348
Olympus 20035, 20226
Onida 20162
Onimax 20642
Onkyo 20222
Optimus 20037, 20048, 20104, 20162, 20432,
21062
Orbit 20072
Orion 20002, 20121, 20184, 20209, 20348,
20479, 21479
Osaki 20000, 20037, 20072
Osume 20072
Otake 20209
Otto Versand 20081
Pacific 20000, 20348, 20642
Packard Bell 21972
Palladium 20037, 20041, 20072, 20209, 20315,
20348
Palsonic 20000, 20037, 20072, 20642
Panasonic 20035, 20162, 20225, 20226, 20614,
20616, 21035, 21062, 21308, 21562
Pathe Cinema 20043
Pathe Marconi 20041
Penney 20035, 20037, 20038, 20042, 20240,
21035, 21237
Pentax 20042
Perdio 20000, 20209
Philco 20000, 20035, 20038, 20072, 20209,
20226, 20479
Philips 20000, 20035, 20081, 20226, 20616,
20618, 20739
Phoenix 20278
Phonola 20081
Pilot 20037
Pioneer 20042, 20067, 20081, 20162, 21562
Polk Audio 20081
Portland 20278
Prinz 20000
Profitronic 20081, 20240
Proline 20000, 20278, 20320, 20642
Proscan 20060, 21060
Prosonic 20278
Protec 20072
Protech 20081, 20278
ProVision 20278
Pulsar 20039
Pye 20000, 20081
Qisheng 20060
Quarter 20046
Quartz 20046
Quasar 20035, 20162, 20278, 21035
Quelle 20081
Radialva 20037, 20048
Radiola 20081
Radionette 20037
RadioShack 20000, 20037
Radix 20037
Randex 20037
Rank 20041
Rank Arena 20041
RCA 20000, 20035, 20042, 20048, 20060,
20149, 20226, 20240, 20320, 20432,
20807, 20880, 21035, 21060
Realistic 20000, 20035, 20037, 20046, 20047,
20048, 20104
Reoc 20348
ReplayTV 20614, 20616
Rex 20041
RFT 20072
Ricavision 21972
Roadstar 20037, 20072, 20081, 20240, 20278
Royal 20072
Runco 20039
Saba 20041, 20067, 20278, 20320
Saisho 20209, 20348
Salora 20043, 20046, 20104
Sampo 20037, 20048
Samsung 20045, 20240, 20432, 20739, 21014
Sanky 20039, 20048
Sansui 20000, 20041, 20067, 20072, 20209,
20348, 20479, 21479
Sanyo 20046, 20047, 20048, 20067, 20104,
20159, 20209, 20240, 20348, 21330
Saville 20240, 20278
SBR 20081
Schaub Lorenz 20000, 20041, 20104, 20315, 20348
Schneider 20000, 20037, 20042, 20072, 20081,
20240, 20278, 20348,20642
Scott 20043, 20045, 20121, 20184
Sears 20000, 20035, 20037, 20042, 20046,
20047, 20104, 21237
Seaway 20278
SEG 20072, 20081, 20240, 20278, 20642
SEI 20081
Seleco 20037, 20041
Semp 20045
Sentra 20072
Serie Dorada 20037
Sharp 20037, 20048, 20209, 20807
Shinco 20000
Shintom 20072, 20104
Shivaki 20037
Shogun 20240
Siemens 20037, 20046, 20081, 20104, 20320,
20347
Siera 20081
Silva 20037
Silver 20278
Singer 20045, 20072, 20348
Sinudyne 20081, 20209
Smaragd 20348
Sonic Blue 20614, 20616
Soniko 20072
Sonitron 20104
Sonneclair 20072
Sonolor 20046
Sontec 20037
Sonwa 20642
Sony 20000, 20032, 20033, 20035, 20636,
21232, 21295, 21972
Soundwave 20037, 20209, 20348
Ssangyong 20072
Stack 9 21972
Starlite 20037
Stern 20278
STS 20042
Sunkai 20209, 20278, 20348
Sunstar 20000
Suntronic 20000
Sunwood 20072
Supra 20037, 20240, 20278, 20348
Sylvania 20000, 20035, 20043, 20081, 21781
Symphonic 20000
Systemax 21972
T+A 20162
Tagar Systems 21972
Taisho 20209
Tandberg 20278
Tandy 20000, 20104
Tashiko 20000, 20037, 20048, 20081, 20240
Tatung 20000, 20041, 20043, 20045, 20048,
20067, 20081, 20209, 20348
Tchibo 20348
TCM 20348
Teac 20000, 20037, 20041, 20072, 20278,
20642
Tec 20072
Tech Line 20072
Technics 20035, 20081, 20162, 20226
TechniSat 20209
Teco 20035, 20037, 20038, 20041, 20048
Tedelex 20037, 20209, 20348, 20642
Teknika 20000, 20035, 20037
Teleavia 20041
Telefunken 20041, 20067, 20209, 20240, 20278,
20320, 20642
Telestar 20037
Teletech 20000, 20072, 20278
Tenosal 20072
Tensai 20000, 20072, 20278
Tevion 20209, 20348, 20642
Texet 20278
Thomas 20000
Thomson 20041, 20060, 20067, 20278, 20320
Thorn 20037, 20041, 20104
Tivo 20618, 20636, 20739, 21503
TMK 20240
Tokai 20037, 20072
Topline 20348
Toshiba 20041, 20042, 20043, 20045, 20067,
20081, 20209, 20432, 20845, 21008,
21145, 21289, 21323, 21503, 21972
Totevision 20037, 20240
Touch 21972
Towada 20072
Tradex 20081
Triad 20278
Uher 20240
Ultravox 20278
Unitech 20240
United 20348
Universal 20209
Universum 20000, 20037, 20081, 20104, 20209,
20240, 20315, 20348
Vector 20045
Vector Research 20038
Victor 20041, 20067, 21283
Video Concepts 20045
Video Technic 20000
Videomagic 20037
Videosonic 20240
Viewsonic 21972
Villain 20000
Voodoo 21972
Wards 20000, 20033, 20035, 20038, 20039,
20042, 20045, 20046, 20047, 20048,
20060, 20072, 20081, 20149, 20240
Watson 20081, 20642
Wharfedale 20642
White Westinghouse 20072, 20209, 20278
World 20348
XR-1000 20000, 20035, 20072
Yamaha 20038, 20041
Yamishi 20072, 20278
Yokan 20072
Yoko 20037, 20240
Yoshita 20072
Zenith 20000, 20033, 20039, 20209, 20479,
21479
ZT Group 21972
ZX 20209, 20348
TV
888 10264, 10412
A-Mark 10003
A.R. Systems 10374, 10455
Abex 10032
Accent 10009
Acura 10009
Addison 10092, 10108, 10653
Admiral 10087, 10093, 10163, 10264, 10363,
10463
Advent 10761, 10783, 10815, 10817, 10842
Adventura 10046
Adyson 10032, 10216, 10217
AEA 10037
AEG 10606
Agashi 10216, 10217
AGB 10516
Agef 10087
Aiko 10009, 10037, 10092, 10216, 10217,
10264
Aim 10045, 10208, 10264, 10339, 10374,
10412, 10455, 10606, 10706, 10753,
10805
Aiwa 10163, 10701, 10705, 10848
Akai 10009, 10030, 10035, 10037, 10060,
10072, 10163, 10178, 10191, 10208,
10216, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10361,
10363, 10371, 10377, 10412, 10433,
10473, 10480, 10516, 10548, 10556,
10581, 10602, 10606, 10631, 10648,
10672, 10696, 10698, 10702, 10706,
10714, 10715, 10729, 10745, 10753,
10812, 11537
Akashi 10009
Akiba 10037, 10218, 10282, 10455
Akira 10037, 10418, 10556
Akito 10037
Akura 10009, 10037, 10218, 10264, 10282,
10359, 10412, 10668, 10714, 11037
Alaron 10179, 10216
Alba 10009, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10216,
10218, 10235, 10247, 10355, 10371,
10418, 10443, 10487, 10581, 10668,
10714, 11037
Albatron 10700, 10843
Albiral 10102
Alfide 10672
Alkos 10035
Allorgan 10206, 10217
Allstar 10037
Ambassador 10177
America Action 10180
Amplivision 10217, 10370
Ampro 10751
Amstrad 10009, 10037, 10171, 10177, 10218,
10264, 10362, 10371, 10412, 10433,
10516, 10581, 10648, 11037
Anam 10003, 10009, 10180, 10250, 10628,
10700, 10861
Anam National 10055, 10250, 10650
Andersson 11163
Anex 10037, 10421
Anglo 10009, 10264
Anhua 10051
Anitech 10009, 10037, 10282
Ansonic 10009, 10104, 10247, 10292, 10370,
10428, 10556, 10668, 11437
AOC 10003, 10009, 10018, 10019, 10030,
10052, 10060, 10092, 10093, 10108,
10178, 10179, 10180, 10185, 10451,
10628
Aolingpu 10858
Aolinpike 10264, 10412
Apex 10156, 10765
Apex Digital 10748, 10765, 10767, 10879
Arcam 10216, 10217
Archer 10003
Ardem 10037, 10486, 10556, 10633, 10714,
10715
Aristona 10037, 10556
ART 11037
ASA 10070, 10087, 10104
Asberg 10102
Asora 10009
Astra 10037, 10264
Asuka 10217, 10218, 10264
ATD 10698
Atlantic 10001, 10206, 10320
Audinac 10180
Audiosonic 10009, 10037, 10109, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10337, 10370, 10374, 10428,
10486, 10714, 10715
Audioton 10217, 10264, 10428, 10486
Audiovox 10003, 10092, 10180, 10451, 10623,
10802, 10875
Autovox 10087, 10206, 10217, 10247, 10544
Aventura 10171
Awa 10009, 10011, 10036, 10037, 10108,
10157, 10216, 10217, 10264, 10374,
10412, 10512, 10606, 10698, 10785
Axxent 10009
Axxon 10714
Baihe 10009, 10264, 10412
Baile 10001, 10009, 10374, 10661
Baird 10072, 10073, 10193, 10208, 10217
Bang & Olufsen 10087, 10565
Baohuashi 10264, 10412
Baosheng 10009, 10817
Barco 10380
Basic Line 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10282,
10339, 10374, 10455, 10556, 10668,
11037, 11163
Bauer 10805
Baur 10009, 10037, 10146, 10361, 10455,
10512, 10535, 10544
Baysonic 10180
Bazin 10217
Beaumark 10178
Beijing 10001, 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264,
10374, 10412, 10482, 10661, 10812,
10817, 10821
Beko 10037, 10292, 10370, 10418, 10428,
10486, 10606, 10714, 10715, 11037
Belcor 10019
Bell & Howell 10016, 10154
BenQ 11032, 11756
Beon 10032, 10037, 10418
Berthen 10668
Best 10337, 10370, 10421
Bestar 10037, 10370, 10374
Bestar-Daewoo 10374
Binatone 10217
Black Diamond 10556, 10587, 10614, 11037
Black Panther 10102
Black Strip 10035
Blaupunkt 10036, 10170, 10191, 10195, 10200,
10455, 10535
Blue Sky 10037, 10218, 10282, 10455, 10487,
10499, 10556, 10606, 10668, 10714,
10715, 11037, 11254, 11437
Blue Star 10282
Bondstec 10247
Boots 10009, 10217
Bosch 10320
Boxlight 10752, 10893
BPL 10037, 10208, 10282
Bradford 10180
Brandt 10109, 10287, 10335, 10560, 10625,
10714
Brandt Electronique 10335
Brinkmann 10037, 10418, 10486, 10668
Brionvega 10087, 10362
Britannia 10216, 10217
Brockwood 10019
Broksonic 10003, 10180, 10236, 10463
Bruns 10087
BTC 10218
Bush 10009, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10208,
10217, 10218, 10235, 10264, 10282,
10355, 10361, 10363, 10371, 10374,
10486, 10487, 10556, 10581, 10614,
10617, 10661, 10668, 10698, 10714,
11037
Caihong 10009, 10817
Cailing 10748
Caishi 10891
Candle 10030, 10046, 10056, 10186
Canton 10218
Carad 10037, 10610, 10668, 11037
Carena 10037, 10455
Carnivale 10030
Carrefour 10036, 10070
Carver 10054, 10170
Cascade 10009, 10037
Casio 10037, 10163
Cathay 10037
CCE 10037, 10217
Celebrity 10000
Celera 10765
Celestial 10767, 10819, 10820, 10821
Centrex 10698, 10780, 10826
Centrum 11037
Centurion 10037
Century 10087, 10238, 10247
CGE 10247, 10370, 10418
CGM 11037
Changcheng 10001, 10009, 10051, 10264, 10374,
10412, 10661, 10817
Changfei 10009, 10374, 10817
Changfeng 10264, 10412, 10696, 10753, 10817
Changhai 10009, 10817
Changhong 10009, 10156, 10264, 10508, 10765,
10767, 10783, 10817, 10820, 10821,
10848, 11156
Chengdu 10009, 10817
Ching Tai 10003, 10009, 10092, 10179
Chun Yun 10000, 10003, 10009, 10092, 10179,
10180, 10700, 10843
Chunfeng 10009, 10264
Chung Hsin 10036, 10053, 10108, 10180
Chungfeng 10412
Chunsun 10009, 10817
Cimline 10009, 10218
Cinema 10672
Cineral 10092, 10451
Citizen 10030, 10039, 10046, 10056, 10060,
10092, 10186, 10280
City 10009
Clairtone 10185
Clarion 10180
Clarivox 10037, 10070, 10337
Clatronic 10009, 10037, 10102, 10217, 10218,
10247, 10264, 10320, 10370, 10371,
10556, 10579, 10606, 10648, 10714
Clayton 11037
CMS 10216
CMS Hightec 10217
Commercial Solutions 10047, 11447
Concerto 10056
Condor 10009, 10037, 10163, 10247, 10264,
10282, 10320, 10370, 10411, 10418
Conia 10754, 10821
Conic 10032
Conrac 10808
Conrowa 10009, 10145, 10156, 10264, 10412,
10696, 10698, 10753, 11156, 11170
Contec 10009, 10036, 10037, 10157, 10180,
10185, 10216, 10264, 10698
Continental Edison 10109, 10287, 10487
Cosmel 10037, 10337
Craig 10180
Crosley 10054, 10087, 10247
Crown 10009, 10037, 10039, 10053, 10180,
10208, 10339, 10359, 10370, 10412,
10418, 10421, 10486, 10487, 10579,
10606, 10672, 10712, 10714, 10715
Crown Mustang 10672
CS Electronics 10216, 10218, 10247
CTC 10247
Curtis Mathes 10016, 10030, 10039, 10047, 10051,
10054, 10056, 10060, 10093, 10145,
10154, 10166, 10451, 10466, 10702,
11147, 11347
CXC 10180
Cybertron 10218
D-Vision 10037, 10556
D.Boss 10037
Daewoo 10003, 10009, 10019, 10030, 10032,
10037, 10039, 10056, 10092, 10108,
10154, 10170, 10178, 10180, 10217,
10218, 10264, 10374, 10451, 10499,
10556, 10623, 10628, 10634, 10661,
10672, 10700, 10706, 10865, 10880,
11661
Dainichi 10216, 10218
Dansai 10009, 10032, 10035, 10036, 10037,
10208, 10216
Dansette 10412
Dantax 10606, 10714, 10715
Datsura 10208
Dawa 10009
Daytek 10037, 10706
Dayton 10009
Daytron 10019, 10374
Dayu 10374, 10661
De Graaf 10208, 10363, 10548
DEC 10418, 10556, 10698, 10785, 10795
Decca 10037, 10072, 10217, 10516, 10621
Deitron 10037, 10374
Dell 11080, 11178, 11264, 11454
Denko 10264
Denon 10145, 10511, 10576
Denstar 10628
Denver 10037, 10587, 10606
DER 10193
Desmet 10009, 10037, 10087, 10320
Diamant 10037
Diamond 10009, 10037, 10216, 10264, 10371,
10672, 10698, 10706, 10825
Dick Smith Electronics
10698
Digatron 10037
Digiline 10105, 10668
Digital Life 10780, 10872, 10891
Digitex 10820
Digitor 10037, 10499, 10698, 11724
Digix 10880
DiK 10037
Dixi 10009, 10037, 10087
DL 10037, 10780, 10848, 10872, 10891
Domeos 10037, 10668, 11037
Domland 10394
Dongda 10009
Donghai 10009
Dream Vision 11704
DSE 10698
Dual 10037, 10217, 10259, 10394, 10531,
10544, 11137
Dual Tec 10217
Dumont 10017, 10019, 10070, 10087, 10102
Dunai 10544
Durabrand 10003, 10171, 10178, 10180, 10463,
11034, 11463
DVX 10891
Dwin 10720, 10774
Dynatron 10012, 10037
E-Elite 10218
Ecco 10706, 10773
ECE 10037
Edison-Minerva 10487
Elbe 10217, 10238, 10259, 10292, 10361,
10362, 10411, 10435, 10516, 10610,
10630
Elbe-Sharp 10516
Electroband 10000, 10185
Electrograph 11755
Electrohome 10381
Elekta 10009, 10037, 10264, 10282
Elektra 10017, 11661
Elin 10009, 10037, 10104, 10163, 10361,
10548
Elite 10218, 10320
Elman 10102
Elta 10009, 10264
Emco 10247
Emerson 10019, 10037, 10038, 10039, 10070,
10087, 10154, 10163, 10171, 10177,
10178, 10179, 10180, 10185, 10236,
10247, 10280, 10282, 10320, 10361,
10370, 10371, 10463, 10486, 10623,
10714
Emperor 10282
Envision 10030, 10813
Enzer 10753
Epson 10833, 10840
Erres 10012, 10037
ESA 10171, 10812
ESC 10037, 10217
Ether 10003, 10009, 10030
Etron 10001, 10009
Eurofeel 10217, 10264
EuroLine 10556
Euroman 10037, 10216, 10217, 10264, 10421
Europa 10037
Europhon 10102, 10163, 10217, 10516
Evolution 11756
Expert 10206
Exquisit 10037, 10247
Fagor 10037
Feilang 10009
Feilu 10009, 10817
Feiyan 10264, 10412
Feiyue 10009, 10817
Fenner 10009, 10374
Ferguson 10037, 10053, 10073, 10109, 10193,
10238, 10287, 10335, 10443, 10548,
10560, 10625
Fidelity 10037, 10163, 10171, 10193, 10216,
10264, 10361, 10363, 10371, 10412,
10512, 10531, 10544
Filsai 10217
Finlandia 10045, 10072, 10163, 10208, 10287,
10346, 10359, 10363,10548
Finlux 10037, 10070, 10072, 10087, 10102,
10104, 10105, 10179, 10217, 10346,
10411, 10473, 10480, 10492, 10516,
10556, 10606, 10621, 10629, 10631,
10714, 10715, 10808
Firstar 10009, 10236
Firstline 10009, 10037, 10072, 10163, 10208,
10216, 10217, 10235, 10238, 10247,
10321, 10361, 10374, 10411, 10531,
10544, 10556, 10587, 10668, 10714,
10808, 11037
Fisher 10036, 10045, 10047, 10072, 10087,
10104, 10154, 10157, 10159, 10208,
10217, 10370, 10544, 10555
Flint 10037, 10072, 10218, 10264, 10455,
10610
Forgestone 10193
Formenti 10037, 10087, 10216, 10320
Formenti-Phoenix 10216, 10320
Fortress 10093
Fraba 10037, 10370
Friac 10009, 10037, 10102, 10370, 10421,
10499, 10610
Frontech 10009, 10163, 10217, 10247, 10264,
10363
Fujitsu 10009, 10037, 10072, 10163, 10179,
10186, 10206, 10217, 10259, 10361,
10683, 10809, 10853
Fujitsu General 10009, 10163, 10206, 10217, 10683
Funai 10171, 10179, 10180, 10264, 10412,
10556, 10668, 11977
Furi 10145, 10264, 10412, 10817
Futronic 10264, 10795
Future 10037
Futuretech 10180
Galaxi 10037, 10361
Galaxis 10037, 10370
Ganxin 10817
Gateway 11755, 11756
GBC 10009, 10218, 10374
GE 10021, 10027, 10030, 10047, 10051,
10055, 10092, 10093, 10109, 10135,
10178, 10180, 10282, 10287, 10335,
10451, 10560, 10625, 11147, 11347,
11447, 11454
GEC 10037, 10072, 10163, 10217, 10361,
10516
Geloso 10009, 10363, 10374
General 10186, 10590
General Technic 10009
Genesis 10009, 10037
Genexxa 10009, 10163, 10218
Gericom 10808, 10865
Giant 10217
Gibralter 10017, 10019, 10030
Gintai 10721
Go Video 10886
Goldfunk 10668
GoldHand 10216
GoldStar 10001, 10019, 10030, 10032, 10037,
10039, 10056, 10109, 10154, 10163,
10178, 10216, 10217, 10247, 10290,
10361, 10363, 10377, 10455, 10556,
10606, 10714, 10715
Gooding 10487
Goodmans 10009, 10032, 10035, 10036, 10037,
10072, 10179, 10217, 10218, 10235,
10264, 10335, 10360, 10371, 10374,
10451, 10480, 10487, 10499, 10516,
10556, 10560, 10579, 10630, 10634,
10661, 10668, 10714, 10808, 11037,
11163
Gorenje 10037, 10370, 10421
GPM 10218
Gradiente 10053, 10056, 10170
Graetz 10037, 10163, 10339, 10361, 10371,
10487, 10714
Gran Prix 10648
Granada 10037, 10045, 10072, 10108, 10146,
10163, 10208, 10217, 10226, 10339,
10356, 10359, 10363, 10473, 10516,
10548, 10560
Grandin 10009, 10037, 10163, 10282, 10320,
10374, 10455, 10579, 10610, 10668,
10714, 10715, 11037
Gronic 10163
Grundig 10036, 10037, 10070, 10191, 10195,
10370, 10443, 10487, 10535, 10556,
10587, 10630, 10672, 10706
Grunpy 10179, 10180
H&B 10808
Haaz 10706
Haier 10037, 10264, 10508, 10587, 10698,
10768, 10779, 10869, 10891, 11034
Haihong 10009
Haiyan 10264, 10412, 10817
Halifax 10217
Hallmark 10178
Hammerstein 10060, 10264
Hampton 10216, 10217
Hanimex 10218
Hankook 10019, 10030, 10056, 10178, 10180,
10628
Hanseatic 10009, 10037, 10087, 10195, 10217,
10282, 10320, 10361, 10377, 10394,
10428, 10499, 10544, 10556, 10634,
10661, 10714, 10808, 11137
Hantarex 10009, 10037, 10102, 10238, 10516,
10865
Hantor 10037
Harley Davidson 10179
Harman/Kardon 10054
Harsper 10865
Harvard 10180
Harwa 10773
Harwood 10009, 10032, 10037, 10412, 10487
Havermy 10093
HCM 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,
10282, 10412, 10418, 10606
Helios 10865
Hello Kitty 10451
Hema 10009, 10217
Hemmermann 10544
Hher 10714
Higashi 10216
Hikona 10218
Himitsu 10180, 10628, 10779
Hinari 10009, 10036, 10037, 10179, 10218,
10235, 10264, 10355
Hisawa 10218, 10282, 10455, 10610, 10714
Hisense 10009, 10037, 10145, 10156, 10208,
10264, 10508, 10512, 10556, 10696,
10706, 10748, 10753, 10780, 10821,
10848, 11156, 11170
Hit 10087
Hitachi 10009, 10016, 10019, 10027, 10030,
10032, 10036, 10037, 10038, 10039,
10044, 10056, 10072, 10092, 10105,
10108, 10109, 10145, 10151, 10156,
10157, 10163, 10165, 10178, 10179,
10186, 10194, 10217, 10356, 10359,
10361, 10363, 10381, 10473, 10480,
10481, 10492, 10499, 10508, 10512,
10516, 10548, 10576, 10578, 10629,
10634, 10719, 10744, 10884, 11037,
11045, 11137, *[11145], 11156, 11170,
11225, 11256, 11481, 11576
Hitachi Fujian 10037, 10108, 10145, 10150, 10499,
10828
Hitsu 10009, 10218, 10455, 10610
HMV 10087, 10193
Home Electronics 10606
Hongmei 10009, 10093, 10264, 10817, 10848
Hongyan 10264, 10412, 10817
Hornyphon 10012, 10037
Hoshai 10282
Hua Tun 10009
Huafa 10009, 10145
Huanghaimei 10009
Huanghe 10009, 10817
Huanglong 10009
Huangshan 10009, 10264, 10412, 10817
Huanyu 10216, 10264, 10374, 10817, 10848
Huaqiang 10264, 10412
Huari 10145, 10264, 10412
Huodateji 10051
Hyper 10009, 10216, 10217, 10247
Hypson 10037, 10264, 10282, 10411, 10455,
10621, 10668, 10714, 10715, 11037
Hyundai 10037, 10698, 10706, 10753, 10849,
10865
Iberia 10037
ICE 10216, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10371,
10556
ICeS 10216, 10218
Imperial 10037, 10163, 10247, 10361, 10370,
10418, 10630
Imperial Crown 10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10412,
10661
Indiana 10037
Infinity 10054
InFocus 10752
Ingelen 10163, 10361, 10487, 10610, 10714
Ingersoll 10009
Inno Hit 10009, 10037, 10072, 10102, 10217,
10247, 10282, 10290, 10516
Innova 10037
Innowert 10865
Inteq 10017
Interbuy 10037, 10247, 10264, 10512
Interfunk 10012, 10037, 10087, 10163, 10200,
10247, 10275, 10361,10512
Internal 10037
Intervision 10009, 10037, 10102, 10163, 10217,
10218, 10247, 10264, 10282, 10370,
10377, 10394, 10455, 10486, 10487
IR 10011, 10012, 10032, 10035, 10036,
10037, 10045, 10070, 10072, 10073,
10087, 10093, 10102, 10104, 10105,
10108, 10109, 10146, 10157, 10163,
10191, 10193, 10194, 10195, 10200,
10206, 10216, 10217, 10226, 10235,
10238, 10247, 10287, 10290, 10291,
10292, 10320, 10356, 10359, 10361,
10363, 10370, 10374, 10512, 10516,
10535, 10556
Irradio 10218, 10247, 10290, 10371
IRT 10451, 10628, 10698, 11661
Isukai 10037, 10218, 10282, 10455
ITC 10217, 10320
ITS 10216, 10264, 10371
ITT 10163, 10179, 10193, 10208, 10339,
10346, 10361, 10473, 10480, 10544,
10548, 10610
ITT Nokia 10163, 10179, 10208, 10339, 10346,
10361, 10363, 10473, 10480, 10548,
10606, 10610
ITV 10037, 10264, 10374
Janeil 10046
JBL 10054
JCB 10000
Jean 10003, 10009, 10036, 10051, 10092,
10156, 10179, 10236, 10721
Jensen 10698, 10706, 10761, 10815, 10817
Jiahua 10051
JiaLiCai 10009, 10264, 10412
Jinfeng 10051, 10208, 10226, 10817
Jinhai 10848
Jinque 10009, 10264, 10412, 10817
Jinta 10009, 10264, 10412, 10848
Jinxing 10009, 10037, 10054, 10145, 10156,
10264, 10556, 10698, 10817, 10821
JMB 10443, 10499, 10556, 10634
JNL 10698
Jocel 10712
Jubilee 10556
Juhua 10264, 10412, 10817
JVC 10036, 10053, 10093, 10193, 10218,
10371, 10418, 10463, 10508, 10576,
10606, 10653, 10683, 10731, 11253
Kaige 10009, 10264, 10412, 10817
Kaisui 10009, 10037, 10216, 10217, 10218,
10282, 10455
Kambrook 10217, 10264, 10556
Kamp 10216
Kangchong 10848
Kangli 10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10661,
10817
Kangyi 10009, 10264, 10412
Kapsch 10104, 10163, 10206, 10361
Karcher 10037, 10163, 10264, 10282, 10421,
10606, 10610, 10714
Kathrein 10556
Kawa 10371
Kawasho 10216
Kaypani 10052
KB Aristocrat 10163
KEC 10180
Kendo 10037, 10102, 10235, 10247, 10362,
10411, 10428, 10512, 10610, 11437
Kennedy 10206, 10435
Kennex 11037
Kenwood 10019, 10030
KIC 10217
Kingsley 10216
Kiota 10001, 10371, 10455
Kioto 10054, 10556, 10706, 10785
Kiton 10037, 10668
KLH 10765, 10767
KLL 10037
Kloss 10024, 10046
Kneissel 10037, 10238, 10259, 10292, 10362,
10374, 10411, 10435, 10499, 10556,
10610
Kolin 10036, 10053, 10108, 10150, 10180
Kolster 10102, 10247
Kongque 10009, 10264, 10817
Konichi 10009
Konka 10037, 10218, 10282, 10371, 10418,
10587, 10628, 10632, 10638, 10641,
10703, 10707, 10714, 10725, 10726,
10754, 10779, 10795, 10816, 10817
Kontakt 10487
Korpel 10037
Korting 10087, 10320, 10421
Kotron 10264
Koyoda 10009
Kraking 10238
Kriesler 10012
KTV 10030, 10039, 10180, 10185, 10217,
10280
Kuaile 10009, 10264, 10412
Kulun 10009
Kunlun 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10374,
10661, 10817
Kyoshu 10032, 10264, 10412, 10418
Kyoto 10032, 10163, 10216, 10217
L&S Electronic 10714, 10808
LaSAT 10486
Leader 10009
Lecson 10037
Legend 10009
Lemair 10032, 10411
Lenco 10037, 10163, 10374, 10721, 11037
Levis Austria 10037
Leyco 10037, 10072, 10264, 10579
LG 10001, 10003, 10019, 10030, 10032,
10037, 10038, 10039, 10056, 10060,
10108, 10178, 10442, 10556, 10606,
10644, 10698, 10700, 10714, 10715,
10856, 11148, 11178, 11265, 11637,
10033
Liesenk & Tter 10037
Liesenkotter 10012, 10037
Lifetec 10037, 10218, 10264, 10374, 10668,
10714, 11037, 11137, 11437
Lihua 10817
Lloyd's 10001, 10009, 10264
Lloytron 10032
Loewe 10037, 10087, 10136, 10292, 10362,
10512, 10516, 10633, 10655
Logik 10001, 10009, 10011, 10016, 10060,
10193, 10264, 10418, 10698, 10706,
10773, 10880
Logix 10668
Longjiang 10264, 10412, 10817
Luma 10206, 10259, 10362, 10363, 11037
Lumatron 10217, 10361
Lux May 10009, 10037, 10556, 10581
Luxman 10056, 10412, 10579
Luxor 10163, 10179, 10194, 10208, 10217,
10290, 10356, 10361, 10363, 10473,
10480, 10548, 10631, 11037, 11163
LXI 10047, 10054, 10154, 10156, 10178
M & S 10054
M Electronic 10009, 10037, 10104, 10105, 10109,
10163, 10217, 10287, 10346, 10374,
10480
Madison 10037
Magnadyne 10087, 10102, 10247, 10516, 10544
Magnafon 10102, 10216, 10516
Magnavox 10020, 10024, 10030, 10036, 10037,
10054, 10096, 10179, 10186, 10187,
10386, 10706, 10729, 10780, 10802,
11254, 11454
Magnum 10037, 10606, 10648, 10714, 10715
Majestic 10016
Manesth 10035, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10235,
10264, 10320, 10361
Manhattan 10037, 10163, 10668, 11037
Marantz 10030, 10037, 10054, 10412, 10556,
10704, 10854, 10855, 11154
Marelli 10087
Mark 10037, 10217, 10486, 10714, 10715
Master's 10499
Masuda 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,
10371
Materin 10208, 10858
Matsui 10009, 10011, 10035, 10036, 10037,
10072, 10163, 10177, 10191, 10195,
10208, 10217, 10235, 10335, 10355,
10363, 10371, 10433, 10443, 10455,
10487, 10516, 10544, 10556, 10579,
10629, 10714, 11037
Matsushita 10051, 10250, 10650
Matsuviama 10587
Maxam 10264
Maxdorf 10773
Maxent 11755
MCE 10009
Mediator 10012, 10037
Medion 10037, 10512, 10556, 10668, 10698,
10714, 10808, 10880, 11037, 11137,
11437
Megapower 10700
Megas 10610
Megatron 10003, 10145, 10178
MEI 10185, 11037
Meile 10264, 10412, 10817, 10848
Melectronic 10009, 10037, 10104, 10105, 10163,
10191, 10195, 10216, 10217, 10247,
10346, 10361, 10374, 10411, 10480,
10492, 10512, 10634, 10661, 10714
Memorex 10009, 10016, 10056, 10060, 10150,
10154, 10178, 10179, 10250, 10463,
11037
Memphis 10337
Mercury 10001, 10009, 10060, 10264, 10473,
10556, 10706
Mermaid 10037
Merritt 10163
Metronic 10625
Metz 10037, 10070, 10087, 10275, 10367,
10388, 10447, 10535, 10587, 10668,
10746
MGA 10019, 10030, 10037, 10150, 10178,
10218, 10374
Micromaxx 10037, 10630, 10668, 10808, 11037
Microstar 10808
MicroTEK 10706
Midland 10017, 10032, 10039, 10047, 10051,
10135
Minato 10037
Minerva 10070, 10108, 10487, 10516, 10535
Minoka 10359, 10412
Minutz 10021
Mistral Electronics 10193
Mitsubishi 10019, 10030, 10036, 10037, 10056,
10087, 10093, 10108, 10150, 10154,
10178, 10179, 10180, 10208, 10236,
10250, 10381, 10512, 10535, 10556,
10817, 10836, 10868, 11037, 11250
Mitsuri General 10163
Mivar 10216, 10217, 10290, 10291, 10292,
10370, 10516, 10609
Monaco 10009
Monivision 10700, 10843
Morgan's 10037
Motorola 10055, 10093
MTC 10019, 10030, 10056, 10060, 10163,
10185, 10216, 10361, 10370, 10512
MTEC 10032
MTlogic 10714
Mudan 10009, 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264,
10412, 10817
Multibroadcast 10193
Multitec 10037, 10486, 10668, 11037
Multitech 10009, 10037, 10102, 10180, 10216,
10217, 10247, 10264, 10363, 10486,
10556
Murphy 10039, 10163, 10216
Musikland 10037, 10218, 10247
Myryad 10556
NAD 10156, 10178, 10361, 10866
Naiko 10037, 10606
Nanbao 10009, 10264, 10412, 10848
Nansheng 10264, 10412, 10817
Naonis 10363
NAT 10226
National 10051, 10055, 10208, 10226, 10508
NEC 10009, 10011, 10019, 10030, 10036,
10046, 10051, 10053, 10056, 10154,
10156, 10165, 10170, 10178, 10186,
10217, 10264, 10320, 10374, 10381,
10412, 10455, 10497, 10499, 10508,
10603, 10661, 10704, 10705, 10817,
10882, 11170, 11270, 11704
Neckermann 10037, 10087, 10163, 10191, 10200,
10247, 10320, 10363, 10370, 10411,
10418, 10512, 10556
NEI 10037, 10163, 10287, 10337, 10371
Neovia 10865
Nesco 10179, 10247
Netsat 10037
NetTV 11755
Network 10032, 10337
Neufunk 10037, 10218, 10556, 10610, 10714
New Tech 10217
Newave 10009, 10092, 10093, 10178, 10721
Nicam 10544
Nicamagic 10216
Nikkai 10009, 10032, 10035, 10036, 10037,
10072, 10216, 10217, 10218, 10264,
10337
Nikko 10030, 10092, 10178
Nikon 10848
Noblex 10154, 10180
Nobliko 10070, 10102, 10216
Nokia 10109, 10163, 10179, 10208, 10320,
10339, 10346, 10359, 10361, 10374,
10473, 10480, 10548, 10606, 10610,
10631
Norcent 10748, 10824
Nordic 10217
Nordmende 10037, 10109, 10163, 10195, 10287,
10335, 10560, 10714
Norfolk 10163
Normerel 10037
Noshi 10018
Novak 10012, 10037
Novatronic 10037, 10105, 10374, 10531
NTC 10092
Nu-Tec 10037, 10455, 10698, 10706, 10820
Oceanic 10163, 10208, 10361, 10473, 10548
Okano 10009, 10037, 10370
Omega 10264
Omni 10264, 10698, 10706, 10780, 10826,
10872, 10891
On Command 10531
Onimax 10714
Onking 10280
Onwa 10102, 10180, 10218, 10371, 10433,
10581, 10602
Optimus 10154, 10166, 10250, 10650
Optoma 10887
Optonica 10093, 10165
Orion 10011, 10037, 10177, 10179, 10235,
10236, 10264, 10320, 10321, 10355,
10412, 10443, 10463, 10516, 10531,
10544, 10556, 10606, 10655, 10714,
10880, 11463
Orline 10037, 10218
Ormond 10668, 11037
Orsowe 10516
Osaki 10032, 10037, 10072, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10355, 10374, 10412, 10556
Osio 10290
Oso 10218
Osume 10032, 10036, 10037, 10072, 10157,
10218
Otto Versand 10036, 10037, 10093, 10109, 10191,
10217, 10226, 10235, 10247, 10320,
10361, 10512, 10535, 10544, 10556
Pacific 10037, 10556, 10714, 11037, 11137
Pael 10216
Palladium 10037, 10247, 10363, 10370, 10411,
10418, 10630, 10655, 10714, 11137
Palsonic 10001, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,
10377, 10412, 10418, 10698, 10773,
10779
Panama 10037, 10217, 10247, 10264
Panashiba 10001
Panasonic 10037, 10051, 10054, 10055, 10108,
10163, 10208, 10226, 10250, 10361,
10367, 10508, 10516, 10548, 10650,
10853, 11310, 11410, 11650
Panavision 10037, 10411
Panda 10009, 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264,
10412, 10508, 10698, 10706, 10780,
10817, 10821, 10826, 10848, 10891
Pathe Cinema 10163, 10216, 10238, 10320, 10370
Pausa 10009
Peng Sheng 10891
Penney 10003, 10018, 10019, 10021, 10027,
10030, 10032, 10039, 10047, 10051,
10056, 10060, 10135, 10156, 10178,
11347
Perdio 10037, 10072, 10163, 10216, 10282,
10320
Phase 10032
Philco 10019, 10020, 10030, 10032, 10037,
10054, 10056, 10087, 10092, 10096,
10145, 10178, 10180, 10186, 10247,
10370, 10418, 10451, 10463, 10628,
10774, 11661
Philex 10193, 10548
Philips 10000, 10009, 10012, 10017, 10019,
10020, 10024, 10027, 10030, 10032,
10037, 10051, 10054, 10056, 10080,
10087, 10092, 10108, 10178, 10186,
10187, 10191, 10193, 10200, 10238,
10361, 10374, 10423, 10556, 10690,
10721, 10772, 10774, 11154, 11454,
11756
Phoenix 10037, 10087, 10216, 10320, 10486
Phonola 10012, 10037, 10080, 10087, 10193,
10216
Pilot 10019, 10030, 10037, 10039, 10706,
10712
Pioneer 10011, 10037, 10038, 10109, 10163,
10166, 10170, 10287, 10361, 10423,
10428, 10486, 10512, 10679, 10760,
10866
Pionier 10486
Plantron 10009
Playsonic 10037, 10217, 10339, 10714, 10715
Polaroid 10765, 10865
Polytron 10282, 10697
Polyvision 10697
Portland 10019, 10039, 10092, 10374
Powerpoint 10037, 10487
Prandoni-Prince 10361, 10363, 10516
Premier 10037, 10264
Prima 10009, 10264, 10412, 10761, 10783,
10815, 10817
Princess 10698
Princeton 10700, 10717
Prinston 11037
Prinz 10194, 10361, 10544
Prism 10051
Profex 10009, 10163, 10361, 10363, 10370
Profex Fidelity 10102
Profi 10009
Profitronic 10037, 10102
Proline 10037, 10072, 10321, 10411, 10556,
10621, 10625, 10630, 10634
Proscan 10047, 11347, 11447
Prosonic 10037, 10217, 10451, 10579, 10668,
10714
Protech 10009, 10037, 10102, 10163, 10180,
10217, 10247, 10264, 10337, 10418,
10486, 10668, 11037
Proton 10001, 10003, 10009, 10030, 10039,
10052, 10056, 10178, 10466, 10644
ProVision 10037, 10556, 10714
Pulsar 10017, 10019
Pye 10012, 10037, 10087, 10193, 10374,
10412, 10556
Qingdao 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10412,
10817
Quadral 10218, 10418
Qualcraft 10039
Quasar 10009, 10051, 10055, 10165, 10247,
10250, 10650, 10865
Quelle 10011, 10037, 10070, 10104, 10200,
10361, 10512, 10535, 10544, 10668,
11037
Questa 10032, 10036
R-Line 10037, 10163
Radialva 10218, 10337
Radiola 10012, 10037, 10217, 10556
Radiomarelli 10037, 10087, 10516
RadioShack 10019, 10030, 10032, 10037, 10039,
10047, 10056, 10154, 10165, 10178,
10180
Radiotone 10009, 10037, 10264, 10412, 10428,
10579, 10648, 10668, 11037
Rank Arena 10036, 10157, 10602, 10753
RBM 10070
RCA 10000, 10018, 10019, 10030, 10038,
10047, 10051, 10060, 10090, 10092,
10093, 10135, 10178, 10560, 10618,
10625, 10679, 10753, 11047, 11147,
11247, 11347, 11447, 11454, 11547
Realistic 10019, 10030, 10032, 10039, 10056,
10154, 10165, 10178, 10180
Recor 10037, 10264, 10418
Rediffusion 10036, 10346, 10361, 10548
Reflex 10037, 10668, 11037
Relisys 10865
Reoc 10714
Revox 10037
Rex 10163, 10206, 10259, 10264, 10363,
10411
RFT 10037, 10072, 10087, 10264, 10370,
10428
Rhapsody 10185, 10216
Ricoh 10037
Rinex 10264, 10418, 10698, 10773
Roadstar 10009, 10037, 10218, 10264, 10282,
10418, 10668, 10714, 11037
Robotron 10087
Rover 10036
Rowa 10009, 10037, 10216, 10217, 10264,
10556, 10587, 10698, 10712, 10748,
10817
Rownsonic 10163
Royal 10418, 10825
Royal Lux 10335, 10412
Runco 10017, 10030, 10497, 10603
Ruyi 10817
Saba 10087, 10109, 10163, 10250, 10287,
10335, 10361, 10498, 10516, 10548,
10560, 10625, 10714
Saccs 10238
Sagem 10455, 10610
Saige 10009, 10817
Saisho 10009, 10011, 10177, 10217, 10235,
10264, 10374, 10516, 10544, 10556
Saivod 10037, 10668, 10712, 11037
Saka 10163
Sakyno 10455
Salora 10163, 10194, 10208, 10290, 10356,
10359, 10361, 10363, 10473, 10480,
10516, 10548, 10606, 10621, 10631
Salsa 10335
Sambers 10102, 10516
Sampo 10009, 10030, 10032, 10036, 10039,
10052, 10092, 10093, 10154, 10171,
10178, 10650, 10700, 10721, 11755
Samsung 10009, 10019, 10030, 10032, 10037,
10039, 10056, 10060, 10072, 10090,
10092, 10093, 10154, 10156, 10163,
10178, 10179, 10195, 10208, 10216,
10217, 10226, 10264, 10290, 10370,
10482, 10556, 10587, 10618, 10644,
10682, 10702, 10718, 10766, 10774,
10812, 10814, 10817, 10821, 11060
Samsux 10039
Sandra 10216, 10217
Sanjian 10264, 10412
Sansei 10451
Sansui 10037, 10264, 10371, 10412, 10455,
10463, 10587, 10602, 10655, 10698,
10706, 10714, 10727, 10729, 10861,
11537
Santon 10009
Sanyo 10011, 10036, 10045, 10072, 10088,
10104, 10108, 10145, 10146, 10154,
10156, 10157, 10159, 10180, 10208,
10216, 10217, 10264, 10280, 10339,
10370, 10381, 10412, 10486, 10508,
10544, 10555, 10556, 10721, 10799,
10893, 11154
Sanyuan 10009, 10093, 10817
SBR 10012, 10037, 10193, 10556
Schaub Lorenz 10037, 10361, 10374, 10486, 10548,
10606, 10714
Schneider 10012, 10037, 10070, 10163, 10217,
10218, 10247, 10259, 10361, 10371,
10394, 10544, 10556, 10648, 10668,
10714, 11037, 11137
Scimitsu 10019
Scotch 10178
Scotland 10163
Scott 10019, 10178, 10179, 10180, 10236
Sears 10047, 10054, 10056, 10146, 10154,
10156, 10159, 10171, 10178, 10179
Seaway 10556, 10634
Seelver 11037
SEG 10009, 10036, 10037, 10102, 10163,
10216, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10362,
10487, 10634, 10668, 11037, 11163,
11437
SEI 10087, 10102, 10177, 10206, 10516,
10544
Sei-Sinudyne 10037, 10087, 10102, 10206, 10516,
10544
Seleco 10163, 10206, 10259, 10264, 10346,
10362, 10363, 10371, 10411, 10435
Semivox 10180
Semp 10156, 11356
Sencora 10009
Sentra 10035
Serino 10093, 10455, 10610
Shancha 10264, 10412, 10817
Shanghai 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10412,
10817, 10848
Shaofeng 10145, 10817
Sharp 10009, 10030, 10032, 10036, 10039,
10053, 10093, 10157, 10165, 10193,
10200, 10256, 10386, 10491, 10516,
10650, 10688, 10689, 10720, 10818,
10851, 11193
Shen Ying 10003, 10009, 10092, 10179
Shencai 10009, 10145, 10264, 10412
Sheng Chia 10009, 10093, 10179, 10236
Shenyang 10009, 10264, 10696, 10753, 10817
Sherwood 10009
Shintoshi 10037
Shivaki 10037, 10178, 10374, 10443, 10451
Shogun 10019
Shorai 10179
Show 10009, 10072, 10418, 10706
Siarem 10087, 10102, 10516
Siemens 10032, 10037, 10146, 10157, 10191,
10195, 10200, 10361, 10535
Siera 10012
Siesta 10370
Signature 10016
Silva 10037, 10216, 10361, 10648
Silva Schneider 10037
Silver 10036, 10037, 10179, 10361, 10455,
10715
SilverCrest 11037
Simpson 10186, 10187
Singer 10009, 10087, 10102, 10163, 10335,
10362, 10371, 10433, 10435, 10548,
10698, 10706, 11537
Sinotec 10264, 10418, 10706, 10773
Sinudyne 10087, 10102, 10177, 10206, 10235,
10516, 10544
Skantic 10356
SKY 10037, 10282
Skygiant 10180
Skysonic 10696, 10753
Skyworth 10009, 10037, 10264, 10696, 10698,
10727, 10748, 10753, 10805, 10817,
10825
Sliding 10865
SLX 10512, 10668
Smaragd 10487
Soemtron 10865
Solavox 10032, 10037, 10072, 10163, 10361,
10548
Sole 10813
Sonawa 10218
Songba 10009
Soniko 10037
Sonitron 10208, 10217, 10339, 10370
Sonoko 10009, 10037, 10282
Sonolor 10163, 10208, 10282, 10361, 10548
Sontec 10009, 10037, 10370
Sony 10000, 10011, 10036, 10037, 10053,
10080, 10093, 10102, 10111, 10145,
10150, 10156, 10157, 10170, 10250,
10353, 10650, 10834, 11100, 11505,
11651
Sound & Vision 10102, 10374
Soundesign 10178, 10179, 10180, 10186
Soundwave 10032, 10037, 10320, 10418, 10715
Sowa 10036, 10051, 10060, 10092, 10156,
10178, 10226
Spectra 10009
Spectricon 10003
Squareview 10171
Ssangyong 10009, 10032
SSS 10019, 10180
Stag 10032
Staksonic 10009
Standard 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10320,
10374, 11037
Starlite 10009, 10037, 10180, 10264
Stenway 10218, 10282
Stern 10163, 10206, 10259, 10363, 10411
Strato 10009, 10037, 10264
Studio Experience 10843
Sunic Line 10037
Sunkai 10037, 10321, 10355, 10455, 10487,
10531, 10610
Sunstar 10009, 10037, 10264, 10371, 10579
Sunwood 10037
Superla 10516
Superscan 10864
Supersonic 10009, 10037, 10208, 10264, 10455,
10698, 10805
SuperTech 10009, 10037, 10216, 10218
Supervision 10264
Supra 10009, 10039, 10056, 10178
Supre-Macy 10046
Supreme 10000
Susumu 10218, 10287, 10335
SVA 10587, 10698, 10748, 10768, 10865,
10870, 10871, 10872
Svasa 10455
Swissline 10247
Sylvania 10020, 10030, 10054, 10096, 10171,
10381
Symphonic 10171, 10180
Synco 10000, 10036, 10060, 10092, 10093,
10178, 10451
Sysline 10037
Sytong 10216
T+A 10447
Tacico 10009, 10092, 10178, 10179
Tai Yi 10009
Taishan 10009, 10374, 10817
Tandberg 10362, 10367, 10411
Tandy 10039, 10072, 10093, 10163, 10217,
10218
Targa 10702
Tashiko 10032, 10036, 10092, 10146, 10163,
10216, 10217, 10359, 10363, 10650,
10721
Tatung 10003, 10009, 10011, 10036, 10037,
10051, 10054, 10055, 10060, 10072,
10154, 10156, 10217, 10516, 10556,
10621, 10629, 11156, 11254, 11756
TCL 10412, 10698, 10706, 10727, 10826,
11537
TCM 10714, 10808
Teac 10009, 10037, 10170, 10171, 10178,
10217, 10247, 10264, 10282, 10412,
10418, 10455, 10512, 10544, 10556,
10668, 10698, 10706, 10712, 10714,
10721, 10755, 11037, 11437, 11724,
11755
Tec 10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10247,
10259, 10337, 10361
Tech Line 10037, 10668, 11437
Techica 10218
Technema 10320
Technics 10051, 10250, 10556, 10650
TechniSat 10037, 10163, 10556, 10655
Technisson 10714
Technol Ace 10179, 10264, 10374, 10412
Technosonic 10556
Techview 10847
Techwood 10003, 10051, 10056, 11163
Tecnimagen 10556
Teco 10009, 10036, 10051, 10092, 10093,
10178, 10218, 10264, 10280, 10653
Tedelex 10009, 10037, 10208, 10217, 10264,
10418, 10556, 10606, 10706, 10726,
10891, 11537
Tek 10009, 10264, 10706, 10795
Teknika 10016, 10019, 10039, 10054, 10056,
10060, 10092, 10150, 10179, 10180,
10186
Telecor 10037, 10394
Telefunken 10037, 10056, 10073, 10109, 10287,
10335, 10346, 10421, 10486, 10498,
10560, 10587, 10625, 10698, 10702,
10706, 10712, 10714, 10753, 10819,
10820, 10821
Telefusion 10037
Telegazi 10037, 10556
Telemeister 10320
Telesonic 10037
Telestar 10009, 10037, 10412, 10556, 10579
Teletech 10009, 10037, 10337, 10668, 11037
Teleton 10036, 10163, 10186, 10206, 10217,
10259, 10363
Televideon 10216, 10320
Teleview 10037
Tempest 10009, 10037, 10264, 10455, 10556
Tennessee 10037
Tensai 10009, 10037, 10104, 10105, 10163,
10217, 10218, 10247, 10320, 10371,
10374, 10377, 10556, 10715, 11037
Tenson 10009, 10320
Tera 10030, 10092, 10466
Tesla 10037
Tevion 10556, 10648, 10668, 10714, 10767,
11037, 11137
Texet 10009, 10216, 10217, 10218, 10374
ThemeScene 10887
Thomson 10037, 10109, 10287, 10335, 10560,
10625, 11447
Thorn 10035, 10036, 10037, 10072, 10073,
10104, 10109, 10163, 10193, 10238,
10335, 10359, 10361, 10499, 10512,
10535
Thorn-Ferguson 10073, 10193, 10238, 10499
Tiane 10093, 10817
TMK 10056, 10177, 10178
TML 11756
TNCi 10017
Tobishi 10218
Tobo 10009, 10264, 10412, 10748
Tokai 10009, 10037, 10163, 10337, 10374,
10668, 11037
Tokaido 11037
Tokyo 10035
Tomashi 10218, 10282
Tongguang 10264, 10412
Tongtel 10587, 10780
Tophouse 10180
Toshiba 10009, 10035, 10036, 10060, 10070,
10093, 10102, 10109, 10145, 10154,
10156, 10191, 10195, 10217, 10264,
10381, 10412, 10508, 10556, 10618,
10644, 10650, 10714, 10718, 10821,
10832, 10845, 11156, 11256, 11265,
11356, 11508, 11656, 11704
Tosonic 10185
Totevision 10039
Towada 10102, 10217, 10264
Toyoda 10009, 10037, 10264, 10412
Trakton 10009, 10217, 10264
Trans Continens 10037, 10217, 10668, 11037
TRANS-continents 10621
Transonic 10009, 10037, 10264, 10418, 10455,
10512, 10587, 10698, 10712, 10780,
10858
Triad 10037, 10218, 10556
Trical 10157
Trident 10516
Tristar 10193, 10218
Triumph 10177, 10346, 10516, 10556
Tsoschi 10282
Tuntex 10009, 10030, 10092
TVS 10463
TVTEXT 95 10556
Uher 10037, 10206, 10320, 10374, 10418,
10480, 10486
Ultravox 10037, 10087, 10102, 10216, 10247
Unic 10163
Unic Line 10037, 10455
United 10037, 10606, 10714, 10715, 11037
Universal 10027, 10037
Universum 10009, 10011, 10032, 10036, 10037,
10070, 10104, 10105, 10146, 10157,
10163, 10170, 10177, 10191, 10200,
10217, 10247, 10264, 10290, 10346,
10361, 10362, 10370, 10411, 10418,
10421, 10473, 10480, 10492, 10512,
10535, 10544, 10556, 10618, 10631,
10668, 11037, 11437
Univox 10037, 10087, 10163, 10337
Utax 10163
V2max 10865
V7 Videoseven 11755
V7Videoseven 10880
Vector Research 10030
Vestel 10037, 10163, 10217, 10556, 10668,
11037, 11163
Victor 10036, 10053, 10250, 10650, 10653
Videocon 10508
Videologic 10216, 10218
Videologique 10218
Videomac 10009, 10264
Videosat 10247
Videotechnic 10217, 10320
Videoton 10356
Vidikron 10054
Vidtech 10019, 10036, 10178
Viewsonic 10724, 10857, 10864, 10885, 11755
Viking 10046
VInc 11756
Vision 10032, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10320
Vistar 10206, 10361, 10548
Vizio 10864, 10885, 11756
Voxson 10087, 10163, 10178, 10363, 10418
Waltham 10037, 10109, 10163, 10217, 10356,
10418, 10443, 10668, 11037
Wards 10000, 10016, 10017, 10018, 10019,
10020, 10021, 10024, 10027, 10030,
10047, 10051, 10054, 10055, 10056,
10060, 10080, 10096, 10111, 10135,
10154, 10156, 10165, 10166, 10178,
10179, 10180, 10186, 10187, 10866,
11147, 11156, 11347
Warumaia 10374, 10661
Watson 10009, 10037, 10218, 10320, 10394,
10579, 10668, 11037, 11437
Watt Radio 10102, 10216, 10544
Waycon 10156
Wega 10036, 10037, 10087
Wegavox 10037
Weipai 10009
Welltech 10714
Weltblick 10217, 10320
Westinghouse 10003, 10889
Weston 10037
Wharfedale 10037, 10264, 10556, 10706, 10861
White Westinghouse 10037, 10186, 10216, 10320, 10337,
10463, 10623
Windsor 11037
Windstar 10282, 10337
Windy Sam 10556
Wintel 10714
World-of-Vision 10880
Worldview 10455
Xenius 10634, 10661
Xiahua 10009, 10264, 10412, 10698, 10773,
10779, 10817
Xianghai 10009
Xiangyang 10264, 10412
Xiangyu 10009
Xihu 10264, 10412, 10817
Xinaghai 10412
Xingfu 10009
Xinghai 10264
Xinrisong 10848
XLogic 10698
XMS 10698
Xoceco 10779, 10785
Xrypton 10037
Xuelian 10848
Yamaha 10019, 10030, 10650, 10769, 10833,
10839
Yamishi 10217, 10282, 10455
Yapshe 10250
Yingge 10009
Yokan 10037, 10109
Yoko 10009, 10037, 10216, 10217, 10218,
10247, 10264, 10339, 10421
Yongbao 10848
Yonggu 10009
Yoshita 10706
Youlanasi 10817
Yousida 10009, 10848
Yuhang 10009
Zanela 10238
Zanussi 10206, 10264, 10363
Zenith 10016, 10017, 10092, 10178, 10463
Zenor 10208, 10339
ZhuHai 10009, 10374
Zonda 10003, 10698, 10779
ZX 10418
CABLE
ABC 00003, 00007, 00008, 00011, 00013,
00014, 00017, 00237
ADB 01063, 01269
Aichi Denshi 01512
Alcatel 00896
Allegro 00153, 00315
Americast 00899
Amstrad 01222
Antronix 00022
Archer 00022, 00153, 00797
Auna 00277, 01269
Austar 00012, 00276
Bell & Howell 00014
Bell South 00899
Birmingham Cable Communications
00276
British Telecom 00003
Cable & Wireless 01068
Cabletenna 00022
Cabletime 00448, 00665
Cableview 00022
Canal Plus 00443
Century 00153
Citizen 00153, 00315
Clearmaster 00883
ClearMax 00883
Comcrypt 00443
Comtronics 00040
Contec 00019
Coolmax 00883
Cryptovision 00600
Daeryung 00008, 00277, 00477, 00877, 01877
Digeo 01187
Digi 00637
Director 00476
Dumont 00637
DX Antenna 01500
Eastern 00002
Emerson 00797
Everquest 00015, 00040
Filmnet 00443, 00619
Focus 00400
Foxtel 01222
France Telecom 00451, 00817, 00896
Freebox 01482
Fujitsu 01497
Funai 00019
Galaxi 00008
Garrard 00153
GE 00237
Gehua 00476
Gemini 00015, 00797
General Instrument 00003, 00011, 00014, 00015, 00276,
00476, 00810
GMI 00015, 00797
Golden Channel 01063, 01110
GoldStar 00040, 00144
Goodmind 00797
Hamlin 00009, 00020, 00034, 00259, 00273
Hitachi 00011, 00014
HyperVision 00619
Hytex 00007
i3 Micro 01602
Jasco 00015, 00153, 00315
Jebsee 00400
Jerrold 00003, 00011, 00012, 00014, 00015,
00276, 00476, 00810
KNC 00008
Leon 00015
LG 00040, 00144
Macab 00817
Magnavox 00014
Maspro 01510
Memorex 00000
MNET 00019, 00443
Moser 00451
Motorola 00276, 00476, 00810, 01106, 01187,
01254, 01376, 01483
Movie Time 00063
Mr Zap 01112
Mr. Zap 01112
MS 00015
Multichoice 00019, 00443
Multitech 00883
MultiVision 00012
Myrio 01602
NEC 01496
Nokia 01569
Noos 00817
NSC 00063
NTL 00003, 00250, 00277, 01060, 01068
Oak 00007, 00019
Ono 01068
Optimus 00021
Optus 00276, 01060
Pace 00008, 00237, 01060, 01068, 01368,
01877
Panasonic 00000, 00008, 00021, 00040, 00107,
00443, 01488
Panther 00637
Paragon 00000
Philips 00013, 00153, 00317, 00619, 00817,
01305
Pioneer 00144, 00533, 00877, 01500, 01877
Popular Mechanics 00400
Pulsar 00000
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
00003
Quasar 00000
Quiero 00817
RadioShack 00015, 00315, 00797, 00883
RCA 00021, 01256
Recoton 00400
Regal 00020, 00259, 00273, 00279
Regency 00002
Rembrandt 00011
Runco 00000
Sagem 00817, 01089, 01112
Salora 00000
Samsung 00000, 00040, 00144, 01060
Scientific Atlanta 00008, 00017, 00237, 00277, 00477,
00877, 01510, 01877
Sejin 01602
Signal 00015, 00040
Signature 00011
SL Marx 00040
Sony 01006, 01460
Sprucer 00021
Starcom 00003, 00014, 00015
Stargate 00015, 00040, 00797
Starquest 00015
Sumitomo 01500, 01504
Supercable 00276
Supermax 00883
Tadiran 00040
Tandy 00258
Tele Danmark 01016
Tele+1 00443
Telepiu 00443
Teleview 00040
Telewest 01068, 01368
Thomson 01110, 01256
Time Warner cable 01877
Timeless 00040
Tocom 00012, 00013
Torx 00003
Toshiba 00000, 01509
Trans PX 00153, 00276, 00315
TransACT 01106
Tri-Vision 01257
Tristar 00883
TS 00003
Tusa 00015
TV86 00063
Unika 00022, 00153
United Artists 00007
United Cable 00003
Universal 00022, 00153, 00191
US Electronics 00276
V2 00883
Videotron 00250
Videoway 00250
Viewmaster 00883
Viewstar 00063, 00258
Vision 00883
Visionetics 01064
Visiopass 00451
Vortex View 00883
Zenith 00000, 00008, 00525, 00899
Zentek 00400
SATELLITE
@sat 01300
@Sky 01334
ABsat 00123, 00668, 00713, 00832
ADB 00642, 00887, 01259, 01367, 01473,
01491, 01492, 01493, 01494, 01495
Aegir 00520
AGS 00668, 00710
Aiwa 01514
Akai 00200, 00515
Akena 00668
Alba 00421, 00455, 00515, 00613, 00713
Aldes 00520
Allsat 00200, 01017, 01043
Allsonic 00369
Alltech 00713
Allvision 01232, 01334, 01412
Alpha 00668
AlphaStar 00772
Amitronica 00713
Ampere 00132, 00396, 00829
Amstrad 00132, 00243, 00345, 00396, 00501,
00675, 00689, 00713, 00742, 00795,
00847, 00863, 00882, 00885, 01113,
01175
Anglo 00713
Ankaro 00369, 00692, 00713, 01279
AntSat 01017, 01083
Anttron 00421, 00613
Apollo 00421, 00455
Arcon 00692, 00834, 01043, 01075, 01205,
01279
Arcus 01143
Arion 01205
Armstrong 00243
Arnion 01300
ASA 00397
Asat 00200
ASCI 00114, 01334
ASLF 00713
AssCom 00853
AST 00321, 00351
Astacom 00668, 00710
Aston 00142, 01261
Astra 00243, 00607, 00713
Astrastar 00548
Astro 00133, 00173, 00358, 00369, 00501,
00520, 00548, 00607, 00613, 00658,
01099, 01100, 01113
Athena 00668
Atsat 01300
AtSky 01334
Audioline 01429
Audioton 00613
Aurora 00642, 00879
Austar 00497, 00642, 00863, 00879, 01173,
01259
Avalon 00396
Axiel 00668, 00710
Axis 00369, 00834, 00880, 01111
Beko 00455
Bentley Walker 01017
Best 00369
Bestar 00243
Black Diamond 01284
Blaupunkt 00173
Blue Sky 00713, 00885
Boca 00132, 00243, 00713, 00794, 00829,
01232
Boston 00132, 00668, 00710
Brainwave 00692, 01294
British Sky Broadcasting
00847, 01175, 01847
Broco 00713
BskyB 00847, 01175
BT 00515, 00668, 00710
Bubu Sat 00713
Bush 01284, 01471
BVV 00692
Cambridge 00501, 00515
Canal Digital 00853
Canal Satellite 00853, 01339
Canal+ 00853
CanalSatellite 00853, 01339
CCE 00345
Century 00856
Channel Master 00212
Chaparral 00053, 00209, 00216
Cherokee 00123, 00710, 01480
Chess 00114, 00713, 01085, 01334
CityCom 00115, 00299, 00607, 00818, 01075,
01176, 01232
Claasen Nachrichten 00520
Clark 00613
Clemens Kamphus 00396, 00834
CNS 01367
CNT 00520
Cobra 00396
Colombia 00132, 00668
Columbia 00132
Columbus 00668
Comag 00132, 01232, 01412
Condor 00369, 00607
Connexions 00396
Conrad 00115, 00132, 00369, 00501, 00607
Conrad Electronic 00607
Cosat 00592
Crossdigital 01109
Crown 00243
Cryptovision 00455
Cyfra+ 01076
Cyrus 00200
D-box 00723, 00873
Daeryung 00396
Daewoo 00421, 00713, 01111, 01296
Daumling 00794
Delfa 00863
Deltasat 01075
Dgtec 01242, 01542
Digatron 01294
Digena 01100
Digenius 00299, 01161
Digiality 00607
Digipro 01105
DigiQuest 00863
DigitAll World 01227
Digiturk 01076
DirecTV 00099, 00247, 00392, 00566, 00639,
00724, 00749, 00819, 01076, 01108,
01109, 01142, 01377, 01392, 01414,
01442, 01443, 01444, 01609, 01639,
01640, 01749, 01856
Discoverer 00605
Discovery 00668, 00710, 01480
Dish Network 00775
Dish Network System
00775, 01005, 01170, 01505, 01775
Dishpro 00775, 01005, 01505, 01775
Distratel 00084, 00885, 01205, 01283
Distrisat 00200
DMT 01075
DNR 00692
DNT 00200, 00396
Dream Multimedia 01237, 01437, 01537, 01637
DST 00421
Dune 00369
DX Antenna 01530
Echostar 00159, 00167, 00269, 00280, 00396,
00454, 00610, 00668, 00713, 00775,
00853, 00871, 01005, 01086, 01170,
01200, 01323, 01409, 01467, 01477,
01505, 01775
EIF 00417
Einhell 00132, 00243, 00421, 00501, 00692,
00713, 00794
Elap 00587, 00668, 00710, 00713
Elsat 00713
Elta 00200, 00369, 00421
Emanon 00421
Emme Esse 00369, 00871
eMTech 01214
Engel 00713, 01017
Eurieult 00084, 00136, 00417, 00882, 00885
Euro1 01278
Eurocrypt 00455
EuroLine 01251
Europa 00501, 00607, 00863
European 00794
Europhon 00132, 00299, 00607
Eurosat 00243
Eurosky 00114, 00115, 00132, 00243, 00299,
00369, 00501, 00607
Eurostar 00115, 00607, 00818, 00880, 00898
Eutelsat 00713
Exator 00421, 00515, 00613
Expressvu 00775, 01775
Fagor 00592
Fenner 00157, 00369, 00605, 00668, 00713
Ferguson 00455, 00711, 01291
Fidelity 00501, 00675
Finlandia 00455
Finlux 00397, 00455, 00573
Flair Mate 00713
Force 01101, 01194
Fortec Star 01017, 01083, 01293
Foxtel 00455, 00497, 00720, 00879, 01162,
01173, 01176, 01356
Fracarro 00421, 00668, 00871
Freecom 00173, 00421, 00501
Freesat 00882
Fresat 00885
FTEmaximal 00331, 00369, 00713, 00794, 00863,
01209, 01449
Fuba 00115, 00173, 00299, 00369, 00396,
00417, 00421, 00573, 01161, 01214
Fugionkyo 01105
Galaxis 00115, 00369, 00592, 00692, 00834,
00853, 00863, 00879, 01101, 01111,
01557
Galaxisat 00321
Gardiner 00818
Garnet 01075
GbSAT 01214
GE 00566
Gecco 01273, 01412
General Instrument 00869
GF 00834, 01043
GF Star 01043
Globo 01087, 01251
GOD Digital 00200
GOI 00775, 01775
Gold Box 00853
Goldbox 00292, 00853
Golden Interstar 01283
Goldvision 01017
Gooding 00571
Goodmans 00455, 01246, 01284
Gradiente 00099, 00856, 00887
Granada 00455
Grandin 00084, 00136, 00417, 00885
Grocos 00243
Grundig 00173, 00345, 00455, 00501, 00571,
00750, 00805, 00847, 00853, 00879,
01150, 01291, 01330, 01335, 01435
Hanseatic 00605, 01099, 01100
Hantor 00421
Hanuri 00520
Hauppauge 01294, 01298
HB 01214
HDT 01011, 01159
Helium 00607
Hinari 00421
Hirschmann 00173, 00299, 00369, 00396, 00397,
00501, 00573, 00607, 00668, 00710,
00882, 01012, 01085, 01111, 01113
Hisense 01535
Hitachi 00455, 00489, 00819, 01250, 01284,
01518, 01523, 01525, 00035
Hnsel & Gretel 00132
Homecable 00238
Homecast 01214
Houston 00396, 00592, 00668
HTS 00775, 01775
Hughes 00749
Hughes Network Syst
00749
Hughes Network Systems
00749, 01142, 01442, 01443, 01444,
01749
Humax 00863, 01176, 01225, 01427, 01568
Huth 00132, 00243, 00607, 00692, 00794,
00829, 01017, 01075
Hwalin 00885
Hypson 00136, 00417
Hyundai 01011, 01075, 01159
iCan 01367
ID Digital 01176
IEEC 00605
ILLUSION sat 01557
iLo 01535
Imex 00084, 00136, 00520
Imperial 01429
Indovision 00887
Ingelen 00114, 00396, 00882
Innova 00099
International 00132, 00243
Interstar 01017, 01105, 01214
Intertronic 00243
Intervision 00592, 00607, 00628
InVideo 00871
IQ 00210
IQ Prism 00210
IR 00173, 00282, 00331, 00358, 00455
Irdeto Technology 00879
ISkyB 00887
Italtel 00871
Jadeworld 00642
Jaeger 01334
Janeil 00152
JOK 00690, 00710
Jolly 00592
JVC 00492, 00515, 00571, 00775, 01170,
01507, 01531, 01775
K-SAT 00713
Kamm 00713, 00880
Kaon 01300
KaTelco 01111
Kathrein 00114, 00115, 00123, 00173, 00200,
00249, 00331, 00358, 00442, 00480,
00553, 00613, 00658, 00713, 00742,
00818, 00898, 01057, 01221, 01561,
01567
Kathrein Eurostar 00115
Kenwood 00853
Key West 00132, 00794
Kiton 00114
Klap 00668, 00710
Kolon 00421
Konig 00607
Koscom 00834, 01043, 01334, 01409
Kosmos 00331, 00442
KR 00592, 00613
Kreiling 00114, 00249, 00658, 01461, 01480
Kreiselmeyer 00173
Kyostar 00421, 00613
L&S Electronic 00132, 00369, 01043, 01334
Labgear 01296
LaSAT 00115, 00132, 00157, 00173, 00243,
00299, 00369, 00520, 00607
Legend 00269
Lemon 00692, 01461
Lenco 00115, 00369, 00421, 00607, 00628,
00692, 00713
Lennox 00592
Lenson 00501
Leyco 00515
LG 01075, 01226, 01414
Lifesat 00132, 00157, 00299, 00369, 00605,
00713, 01043, 01122
Lifetec 00587
Lodos 01284
Loewe 00243
Logix 01017, 01075
Lorenzen 00132, 00299, 00607, 00692, 00742,
00794, 00867, 01161, 01294
Lupus 00369
Luxor 00345, 00501, 00573
M vision 01557
Magnavox 00722, 00724
Manata 00132, 00136, 00417, 00668, 00710,
00713
Manhattan 00455, 00520, 00592, 00834, 01017,
01083
Marantz 00200
Marave 00417
Mascom 00520
Maspro 00173, 00571, 00692, 00713, 00750,
01530
Mastec 01334
Matsui 00173, 00571, 00710, 01284
Matsushita 00500
Max 00607
Maximum 01075, 01334
MB 00605
MDS 01225
Mediacom 01206
Mediamarkt 00243
MediaSat 00292, 00501, 00853
Medion 00132, 00299, 00369, 00713, 01043,
01075, 01161, 01232, 01334, 01412
Medison 00713
Mega 00200
Melectronic 00818
Memorex 00269, 00724
Metronic 00084, 00132, 00136, 00243, 00421,
00520, 00613, 00713, 00818, 00885,
01205, 01215, 01279, 01282, 01283,
01334
Metz 00173
Micro 00501, 00607, 00613, 00713, 01294
Micro electronic 00713
Micromaxx 00299, 00369
Microstar 01075
Microtec 00713
Minerva 00571
Mitsubishi 00455, 00749
Morgan's 00132, 00200, 00243, 00713, 00794,
00829, 01232
Motorola 00856, 00869
Multichoice 00642, 00879
Multistar 00331
Myryad 00200
Mysat 00713
NEC 00496, 01270, 01519
NEOTION 01334
Netgem 01322
Netsat 00099, 00887
Neuhaus 00501, 00592, 00607, 00692, 00713,
00834
Neuling 00132, 01232
Neusat 00587, 00692, 00713, 00834, 01279,
01334, 01409
Neveling 01161
Newton 00396
Next Level 00869
NextWave 01017, 01143
Nikko 00200, 00243, 00713
Nokia 00397, 00455, 00573, 00723, 00751,
00853, 00873, 01023, 01223, 01310,
01311, 01312, 01723
Nordmende 00421, 00455, 00520
Octagon 00421, 00613
OctalTV 01294, 01505
Okano 00243, 00331, 00442, 00668
Opentel 01232, 01412
Optex 00114, 00136, 00417, 00592, 00834,
01043, 01283
Optus 00879, 01143
Orbis 01334
Orbit 00351
Orbitech 00114, 00157, 00421, 00501, 00548,
00834, 01099, 01100
Origo 00497
OSAT 00345
Ouralis 01205
Oxford 00515, 00668
Pace 00200, 00241, 00329, 00455, 00497,
00720, 00791, 00795, 00847, 00853,
00867, 00879, 00887, 01175, 01323,
01356, 01423, 01623
Pacific Satellite 00834
Packard Bell 01111
Packsat 00710
Palcom 00299, 00587, 01161
Palladium 00243, 00396, 00421, 00501, 00571
Palsat 00157, 00501
Panarex 01159
Panasat 00615, 00879
Panasonic 00152, 00247, 00455, 00500, 00701,
00847, 01304, 01320, 01404, 01508,
01526
Panda 00173, 00455, 00607, 00834
Pansat 01011, 01159
Patriot 00132, 00515, 00668, 00710
Paysat 00724
Philips 00099, 00133, 00173, 00200, 00292,
00455, 00571, 00613, 00668, 00710,
00722, 00724, 00749, 00750, 00805,
00818, 00853, 00856, 00887, 00898,
01076, 01114, 01118, 01142, 01442,
01749
Phoenix 01273
Phonotrend 00592, 00863, 01017, 01200
Pilotime 01339
Pino 01334
Pioneer 00292, 00329, 00352, 00853, 01308
Planet 00396, 00871
Plasmatic 00442
Polytron 00396
Praxis 01123
Predki 00421
Preisner 00132, 00396, 00794, 01101, 01113
Premier 00292, 00592
Premiere 00292, 00723, 00873, 01429
Prima 00795
Primacom 01111
Pro Visat 00520
Prod 00573, 00639, 00723, 00873
Profile 00710
Promax 00455
Prosat 00628, 01173
Proscan 00392, 00566
Protek 01567
Proton 01535
ProVision 00520
Pye 00571
Pyxis 00834
QNS 01367, 01404
Quadral 00369, 00628, 00668, 00710, 01012
Quelle 00115, 00299, 00607, 00742
Radiola 00200
RadioShack 00869
Radix 00285, 00396, 00882, 01113
Rainbow 00613
RCA 00143, *[00392], 00566, 00855, 01291,
01392
Realistic 00052
Rebox 01214
Red Star 00369
Regal 01251
RFT 00200
Roadstar 00713, 00853
Roch 00136
Romsat 00421
Rover 00369, 00628, 00713
S-ZWO 01207
SAB 01251
Saba 00115, 00520, 00607, 00690, 00692,
00710, 00885, 01012
Sabre 00455
Sagem 00820, 01114, 01253, 01307
Samsung 00853, 00863, 01017, 01108, 01109,
01206, 01243, 01244, 01276, 01292,
01293, 01343, 01377, 01442, 01458,
01570, 01609
Sanyo 00493, 01219
SAT 00321, 00351, 00501, 00675
Sat Control 01300
Sat Cruiser 01143
Sat Partner 00421, 00501, 00520, 00613, 00692
Sat Team 00713
Satcom 00605, 00607
Satec 00713, 00834
Satelco 00369, 01232
Satline 00628
Satplus 00157, 01100
Satstation 01083
Schaub Lorenz 01214
Schcke 00613
Schneider 00157, 00668, 00710, 00805, 00898,
01206, 01251
Schwaiger 00132, 00157, 00587, 00605, 00607,
00692, 00863, 00885, 01075, 01083,
01111, 01334, 01474
SCS 00115, 00299
Sedea Electronique 00132, 00421, 01105, 01206, 01283
Seemann 00243, 00396, 00515
SEG 00114, 00369, 00421, 00605, 00742,
01075, 01087, 01191, 01251
Seleco 00592, 00871
Septimo 00885, 01205
Serino 00610
Servi Sat 00136, 00592, 00713
ServiSat 01251
Sharp 00494, 01517
Siemens 00173
Silva 00299
Skantin 00713
Skardin 00587
SKR 00713
SKT 01449
SKY 00099, 00711, 00847, 00856, 00887,
01014, 01175, 01847, 01848, 01856
SKY Italia 01847, 01848
Sky Television 01014
Sky XL 01251, 01412
Sky+ 01175
Skymaster 00157, 00587, 00605, 00628, 00713,
00880, 01075, 01085, 01200, 01409
Skymax 00200
Skyplus 01232, 01334, 01409, 01412
SkySat 00114, 00157, 00501, 00605, 00607,
00713
Skyvision 01334
SL 00132, 00243, 00299, 00692, 00742,
01294
SL Marx 00692
SM Electroni 00157, 00587, 00713, 01200, 01409
Smart 00115, 00132, 00299, 00396, 00713,
00794, 00829, 00882, 01101, 01113,
01232, 01273
Sony 00275, 00282, 00292, 00294, 00486,
00489, 00492, 00493, 00494, 00496,
00500, 00639, 00847, 00853, 01524,
01558, 01639, 01640
SR 00132, 00243
Star 00887
Star Choice 00869
Star Trak 00180, 00421
Starland 01122
Starlite 00200
Stream 01847, 01848
Strong 00132, 00369, 00421, 00520, 00613,
00853, 00879, 01105, 01147, 01158,
01159, 01300, 01409
STS 00210
STVI 00136, 00417
Sunkai 00123
Sunny 01300
Sunny Sound 00369
Sunsat 00713
Sunstar 00132, 00243, 00369, 00642, 00794,
00829
Supermax 01143, 01283
Supernova 00887
Tantec 00455
Tarbs 01225
Tatung 00455
TCL 01143
Teac 01225, 01227, 01251, 01322
Techniland 00592
TechniSat 00114, 00157, 00200, 00396, 00455,
00501, 00548, 00863, 01099, 01100,
01195, 01322
Technomate 01283
Technosat 01143, 01206
Technotrend 01429
Technowelt 00132, 00607
Techsan 01017
Techwood 00114, 01284
Teco 00243
tekComm 01017
Telasat 00115, 00605, 00607
Teleciel 00613, 01043
Telefunken 00421
Teleka 00243, 00396, 00501, 00607, 00613,
00692, 00750, 00834
Telemaster 00520
Telesat 00605
Telestar 00114, 00157, 00501, 01099, 01100,
01251, 01334
Telesystem 00396, 01251
Teletech 00114, 00880
Televes 00132, 00455, 00501, 01214, 01300
Televisa 00887
Telewire 00592
Tempo 01143
Tevion 00713, 01334, 01409
Thomson 00115, 00292, 00392, 00455, 00607,
00668, 00710, 00711, 00713, 00820,
00847, 00853, 01012, 01046, 01175,
01291, 01498, 01900
Thorn 00455
Tioko 00132, 00243
Tivo 01142, 01442, 01443, 01444
Tokai 00200
Tonna 00455, 00501, 00587, 00592, 00668,
00713, 00834
Topfield 01206, 01207, 01545
Toshiba 00082, 00455, 00486, 00749, 00790,
01285, 01446, 01501, 01516, 01530,
01749
TPS 00820, 01253, 01307
Triad 00321, 00351, 00372
Triasat 00501
Triax 00114, 00115, 00132, 00200, 00396,
00501, 00713, 00853, 01099, 01113,
01227, 01251, 01291, 01296
Trio 01075
TT-micro 01429
Turnsat 00713
Twinner 00136, 00713
UEC 00879, 01162
Uher 00157
UltimateTV 01392, 01640
Uniden 00052, 00074, 00076, 00238, 00722,
00724, 00834
Unisat 00132, 00200, 00243
United 01251
Universum 00114, 00115, 00173, 00299, 00397,
00571, 00607, 00675, 00742, 01087,
01099, 01251
US Digital 01535
USDTV 01535
Van Hunen 01161
Variosat 00173
Vega 00369
Ventana 00200
Vestel 00114, 00742, 01251
Victor 00492
Visionic 01105, 01206, 01279, 01283
Visiosat 00114, 00142, 00690, 00710, 00713
Vivid 01162
Voom 00869
Vortec 00421
VTech 00321, 00351, 00690, 00818
Welltech 00157
Wetekom 00157, 00501, 00605, 00829
Wewa 00455
Wibo 00243
Wintel 00299, 01161
Wisi 00173, 00299, 00321, 00351, 00372,
00396, 00455, 00501, 00607, 00638,
00690
Woorisat 00520
Worldsat 00114, 00123, 00668, 00710, 01012,
01251, 01323, 01480
Xcom 00123, 00668, 00832
Xcom Multimedia 00668
XMS 01075
Xrypton 00369
Xsat 00123, 00668, 00713, 00847, 01214,
01323
Xtreme 01300
Yes 00887
Zaunkonig 00692
Zehnder 00114, 00115, 00321, 00331, 00369,
00520, 00742, 00818, 01075, 01191,
01232, 01251, 01334, 01412
Zenith 00856, 01856
Zinwell 01173
Zodiac 00396, 00613
Zwergnase 00243, 00794
CD
Acoustic Research 30420
ADC 30018
Adcom 30155, 30234
Advantage 30032
Aiwa 30012, 30124, 30157, 31690
Akai 30156, 30766, 31688
Arcam 30157
Audio Alchemy 30194
Audio Dynamics 30018
Audio Pro 30437
Audio Research 30157
Audio-Technica 30170
Audiolab 30157
Audiomeca 30157
Audioton 30157
Bestar 30164
BSR 30194, 30245
Burmester 30420
Bush 30245
Cairn 30157
California Audio Labs 30029, 30303
Cambridge 30157
Carrera 30194
Carver 30157, 30179, 30437
CCE 30157
CDC 30420
CEC 30174, 30420
Classic 31297
Condor 30164, 30194
Copland 30393
Crown 30122
Cyrus 30157
DAK 30245
DBX 30018, 30254
Denon 30003, 30626, 30766, 30873, 31234,
*[31867], 31868
DKK 30000
DMX Electronics 30157
Dual 30003, 30194, 30196
Dynamic Bass 30179
EEC 30194
Elektra 30437
Emerson 30155, 30164, 30305, 30469
Fisher 30088, 30174, 30179, 30342, 31325
Garrard 30245, 30280, 30393, 30420, 30425
GE 30009
Genexxa 30032, 30164, 30305, 30426
Goldmund 30157
GoldStar 30417, 31208
Goodmans 30245, 30280, 30305
GPX 31296
Grundig 30157
Harman/Kardon 30157, 30173, 30426, 31202
Hitachi 30032, 30155, 30038
Inkel 30180, 30196, 30437
Integra 30101
Intersound 30245
IR 30000
JVC 30072, 30655, 31294, 31697
Kenwood 30028, 30036, 30037, 30157, 30190,
30626, 30681, 30826
KLH 31318, 31711
Kodak 30287
Korsun 31484
Koss 31317
Krell 30157
Kyocera 30018
LG 31208
Linn 30157
Loewe 30157
Luxman 30093, 30393
LXI 30305
Magnavox 30157, 30305
Marantz 30029, 30157, 30180, 30626
Mark 30194
Mark Levinson 31484
Matsui 30157
McIntosh 30287
MCS 30029, 30043
Memorex 30032, 30155, 30164, 30175, 30180,
30305
Meridian 30157
Micromega 30157
Miro 30000
Mission 30157
Mitsubishi 30156
MTC 30420
Musical Fidelity 30393, 30437
Myryad 30157
NAD 30000, 31208
Nagaoka 30018
Naim 30157
Nakamichi 30147
NEC 30043, 30234
Nikko 30164, 30170, 30174
NSM 30157
Oak 30145
Onkyo 30101, 30868, 31685
Optimus 30000, 30032, 30037, 30087, 30145,
30175, 30179, 30194, 30196, 30280,
30305, 30342, 30420, 30426, 30437,
30468, 31063, 31075
Orion 30393
Panasonic 30029, 30207, 30303, 30752, 31682
Parasound 30194, 30420
Penney 30043
Perform Hifi 30420
Philips 30157, 30287, 30626
Pioneer 30032, 30101, 30305, 30468, 31062,
31063, 31087
PMG 30164
Polk Audio 30157
Poppy 30164
Proceed 30420
Proton 30157
QED 30157
Quad 30157
Quasar 30029
Radiola 30157
RadioShack 31075
RCA 30009, 30032, 30053, 30155, 30179,
30305, 30420, 30468, 30764, 31062
Realistic 30155, 30164, 30175, 30179, 30180,
30420
Restek 30157
Revox 30157
Roadstar 30461
Roksan 30420
Rotel 30157, 30420
Royal 30164, 30420
SAE 30157
Sansui 30157, 30202, 30305
Sanyo 30087, 30179, 30342
SAST 30157
Scott 30155, 30164, 30305
Sears 30305
Sharp 30037, 30180, 30861, 31658, 31684
Sherwood 30180, 30196, 30426, 31067
Shure 30043
Siemens 30157, 30180
Silsonic 30036, 30888
Simaudio 30157
Sonic Frontiers 30157
Sony 30000, 30100, 30185, 30490, 30604,
30605, 31364
Soundesign 30145, 30425
STS 30018
Sugden 30157
Symphonic 30305
TAG McLaren 30157
Tandy 30032
Tascam 30420
TDK 31208
Teac 30174, 30180, 30393, 30420
Tec 30245
Technics 30029, 30207, 30303
Thomson 30053
Thorens 30157
Thule Audio 30157
Tivoli Audio 31553
Tokai 30164, 30420
Toshiba 31693
Traxdata 30626
Universum 30053, 30157, 30437
Vector Research 30194, 30417
Victor 30072
Wards 30000, 30032, 30053, 30087, 30157,
30179
Yamaha 30000, 30032, 30036, 30037, 30170,
30187, 30888, 31292
Yoko 30194
Yorx 30461
Zonda 30157
CDR
Classic 31297
Denon 30626, 30766, 31868
Fisher 31325
GPX 31296
Harman/Kardon 31202
JVC 30072, 31294
Kenwood 30626
LG 31208
Marantz 30626
NAD 31208
Philips 30626
Pioneer 31062, 31087
RCA 30053, 30420
Sony 30000, 30100, 31364
TDK 31208
Teac 30420
Yamaha 30888, 31292
TAPE
Aiwa 20029, 20197, 20200, 21315
Akai 20283, 20439
Arcam 20076
Carver 20029
Denon 20076, 20371, 21311, 21471
Fisher 20074
Garrard 20308, 20309, 20375, 20439
Genexxa 20439
GoldStar 20353, 20375
Grundig 20029, 20229, 20375
Harman/Kardon 20029, 20182, 21314
Inkel 20070, 20071, 20337
JVC 20244, 20273, 20274, 20303, 20304,
20310, 21309
Kenwood 20070, 20071, 20092, 20233, 20234,
21364
LG 20375
Luxman 20308, 20309
Magnavox 20029
Marantz 20009, 20029
Memorex 20099
Mitsubishi 20283, 20439
Myryad 20029
Onkyo 20135, 20136, 20282
Optimus 20027, 20220, 20337, 20439
Orion 20308, 20309, 20353
Panasonic 20229
Philips 20029, 20229
Phonotrend 20337
Pioneer 20027, 20099, 20220, 21306, 21312
Polk Audio 20029
Radiola 20029
RCA 20027, 20220
Revox 20029, 20190
Sansui 20009, 20029
Sanyo 20074
Sharp 20231, 20371
Sherwood 20337
Siemens 20029
Sonic 20375
Sony 20170, 20234, 20243, 20291, 21313
TaeKwang 20439
Tandberg 20109
Teac 20280, 20283, 20289, 20308, 20309
Technics 20229, 20353
Thorens 20029
Universum 20375, 20439
Victor 20244, 20273, 20274
Wards 20027, 20029
Wharfedale 20439
Yamaha 20094, 20097
PVR
ABS 21972
Alienware 21972
CyberPower 21972
Dell 21972
DirecTV 20739
Gateway 21972
Hewlett Packard 21972
Howard Computers 21972
HP 21972
Hughes Network Systems
20739
Humax 20739
Hush 21972
iBUYPOWER 21972
Linksys 21972
Media Center PC 21972
Microsoft 21972
Mind 21972
Niveus Media 21972
Northgate 21972
Panasonic 20616
Philips 20618, 20739
RCA 20880
ReplayTV 20614, 20616
Sonic Blue 20614, 20616
Sony 20636, 21972
Stack 9 21972
Systemax 21972
Tagar Systems 21972
Tivo 20618, 20636, 20739
Toshiba 21008, 21972
Touch 21972
Viewsonic 21972
Voodoo 21972
ZT Group 21972
These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT/CBL mode.
TV/DVD Combination
Advent 41016
Apex Digital 40830
Audiovox 41071, 41121, 41122
Axion 41071
Broksonic 40695
Bush 40516, 40713, 40884
Denver 41353, 41359
Emerson 41268
Go Vision 41071
Grundig 40695
Hitachi 41247
Jensen 41016
Konka 40719, 40720
Panasonic 41490
Philips 40854, 41260
Prima 41016
RCA 41022
Samsung 40899
Sansui 40695
Sova 41122
Sylvania 40675, 41268
Toshiba 40695
These preset codes can be recorded in the DVD mode.
Bush 10698, 11037
Denver 10587
Sylvania 10171
These preset codes can be recorded in the TV mode.
TV/VCR Combination
America Action 10180
Audiovox 10180
Emerson 10236
Funai 11977
These preset codes can be recorded in the TV mode.
Aiwa 20000, 20479
America Action 20278
Audiovox 20278
Broksonic 20002, 20479, 21479
Citizen 21278
Colt 20072
Curtis Mathes 21035
Daewoo 21278
Emerson 20002, 20294, 20479, 21278, 21479
Funai 20000, 21333
GE 20240, 20807, 21035, 21060
GoldStar 21237
Harley Davidson 20000
Hitachi 20000
Lloyd's 20000
Magnasonic 21278
Magnavox 20000, 21781
Magnin 20240
Memorex 20162, 21237
MGA 20240
Mitsubishi 20043, 20807
Optimus 20162
Orion 20002, 20479, 21479
Panasonic 20162, 21035, 21308
Penney 20240, 21035, 21237
Philco 20479
Quasar 20162, 21035
RadioShack 20000
RCA 20240, 20807, 21035, 21060
Samsung 20432, 21014
Sansui 20000, 20479, 21479
Sanyo 20240, 21330
Sears 20000, 21237
Sharp 20807
Sony 20000, 21232, 21295
Sylvania 21781
Symphonic 20000
Teac 20000
Thomas 20000
Toshiba 20845, 21145, 21323
Zenith 20000, 20479, 21479
These preset codes can be recorded in the VCR mode.
TV/VCR/DVD Combination
Akai 40899
Broksonic 40868
Emerson 40821
Funai 41334
Magnavox 40821
Panasonic 41362, 41462
RCA 41132
Sharp 40630
Superscan 40821
Sylvania 40821
Toshiba 41045
These preset codes can be recorded in the DVD mode.
Sharp 20807
This preset code can be recorded in the VCR mode.
CABLE/PVR Combination
Americast 00899
Digeo 01187
Freebox 01482
General Instrument 00476, 00810
Jerrold 00476, 00810
Motorola 00476, 00810, 01106, 01187, 01376
Nokia 01569
Pace 00237, 01877
Pioneer 00877, 01877
RCA 01256
Scientific Atlanta 00877, 01877
Sony 01006
Supercable 00276
Thomson 01256
Zenith 00899
These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT/CBL mode.
DBS/PVR Combination
@sat 01300
Atsat 01300
British Sky Broadcasting
01175
Canal Satellite 01339
Comag 01412
Digiturk 01076
DirecTV 00099, 00392, 00639, 01076, 01142,
01377, 01392, 01442, 01443, 01444,
01640
Dish Network System
00775, 01505
Dishpro 00775, 01505
Dream Multimedia 01237
Echostar 00610, 00775, 01170, 01505
Euro1 01278
Expressvu 00775
Force 01194
Foxtel 01356
GbSAT 01214
Grundig 01150
Hughes Network Systems
01142, 01442, 01443, 01444
Humax 01176, 01427, 01568
Hyundai 01159
JVC 01170
Kathrein 01221, 01561
Maximum 01334
Motorola 00869
Nokia 01310, 01311
Opentel 01412
Pace 01423, 01623
Panasonic 01320
Philips 00099, 01142, 01442
Proscan 00392
RCA 01392
Rebox 01214
Sagem 01253, 01307
Samsung 01442
SKY 01175, 01848
Skyplus 01412
Sony 00639, 01640
Star Choice 00869
Strong 01158, 01300
Thomson 01900
Topfield 01206, 01545
TPS 01253, 01307
Zehnder 01075, 01412
These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT/CBL mode.
*[ ] : Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory.
*[ ] : Les codes préréglés diffèrent en fonctiom des livraison
de l’usine.
DVD preset codes
41470 (default) 40490
DENON Model No.
DVD-555
DVD-755
DVD-900
DVD-910
DVD-955
DVD-1000
DVD-1200
DVD-1500
DVD-1710
DVD-1910
DVD-2200
DVD-2800
DVD-2800II
DVD-2900
DVD-800
DVD-1600
DVD-2000
DVD-2500
DVD-3000
DVD-3300
DVD-2910
DVD-3800
DVD-3910
DVD-5900
DVD-5910
DVD-9000
DVM-715
DVM-1800
DVM-1805
DVM-1815
DVM-2815
DVM-4800
Denon Brand Company, D&M Holdings Inc.
Printed in Japan 00D 511 4398 001
TOKYO, JAPAN
www.denon.com
… 18 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Denon-AVR-3806

  • Hallo,

    Wij hebben een Denon avr 3806 waarbij het geluid het niet meer bij doet sinds ik per ongeluk een knop heb ingedrukt op de afstandsbiediening... heeft iemand een idee welke knop het is? Suggesties zijn ook welkom..

    Alvast bedankt Gesteld op 20-4-2013 om 17:30

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Wij hebben een Denon 2500 bluray speler aangesloten op de hdmi INgang van onze denon 3806.
    De denon avr-3806 lijkt niet te reageren op de signalen uit de denon 2500 blurayspeler.

    Handleiding is helaas in het spaans ipv engels of nederlands of duits.
    Wij doen ons best (mbv google translator) om het hdmi probleem op te lossen. Gesteld op 6-7-2011 om 12:27

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Natuurliojk geeft de receiver via HDMI wel geluid door, zoals elke receiver. Geantwoord op 7-10-2013 om 00:23

    Waardeer dit antwoord (4) Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Denon AVR-3806 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Denon AVR-3806 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 10,24 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Denon AVR-3806

Denon AVR-3806 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 236 pagina's

Denon AVR-3806 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Italiano, Espanõl - 111 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info